LaGrange, Georgia
Bulletin 1993-94
Communications Directory
For prompt attention, please address inquiries as indicated below:
General Information (882-291 1 )* Office of the President
Admission (812-7260) Director of Admission
Alumni Interest and Gifts (812-7245) Director, Alumni Activities
Bequests and Gifts (81 2-7257) Vice President for Advancement
Business Matters and Expenses (812-7278) Business Manager
Educational Program (81 2-7235).... Vice President and Dean of the College
Public Relations and News (812-7246) ....Director of Institutional Relations
Financial Assistance (81 2-7249) Director of Student Financial Planning
Student Affairs
Housing and Counseling (81 2-7269) Dean of Student Development
Summer School (81 2-7260) Director of Admission
Transcript and Academic Reports (812-7237) Registrar
Placement (81 2-7286) Director of Career Planning and Placement
*Area code is 706
Visitors are welcome at LaGrange College throughout the year. The
administrative offices in the Quillian Building are open Monday through
Friday from 8:15 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Saturday visits may be arranged by
appointment. Visitors desiring interviews with members of the staff are
urged to make appointments in advance.
The College information telephone number is (706) 882-291 1 .
FAX: (706) 884-6567
Mailing address:
LaGrange College
601 Broad St.
LaGrange, Georgia 30240-2999
LaGrange College admits qualified students of any race, color, national
and ethnic origin to all the rights, privileges, programs, and activities gen-
erally accorded or made available to students at the school. It does not
discriminate on the basis of sex, race, color, national or ethnic origin in
administration of its educational policies, admissions policies, scholarship
and loan programs, and athletic and other school-administered programs.
(USPS 299-300)
Entered as second class matter of the Post Office of
LaGrange, Georgia 30240, under the act of August 24, 191 2.
/I
VOLUME CLIII SEPTEMBER 1993 NUMBER 1
Bulletin
LaGrange, Georgia
CATALOGUE ISSUE 1993-94
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2013
http://archive.org/details/lagrangecollegeb1993lagr
/3
Contents
Communications Directory Inside Front Cover
Calendar 4
About LaGrange College, Purpose and History 7
The LaGrange College Campus 11
Admission 17
Financial Information 21
Financial Planning 25
Student Development 51
Academic Programs and Degree Requirements 61
Academic Regulations and Procedures 73
Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs 85
Departments and Courses 91
Faculty, Trustees and Administration 199
Degrees Awarded, June 1993 212
Index 216
CHANGE OF REGULATIONS
The College reserves the right to make modifications in the degree require-
ments, courses, schedules, calendar, regulations, fees and other changes
deemed necessary or conducive to the efficient operation of the College. Such
changes become effective as announced by the proper college authorities.
Note: For information, regulations and procedures for graduate study,
please see the Graduate Bulletin.
4/
Calendar, 1993-94
Fall, 1993
September 7
September 8,9,10
September 11
September 13
September 13,14
September 14
September 15
September 1 7
Faculty assemble
Faculty workshop
New students arrive
Registration for night classes
Registration for day classes
Night classes begin
Opening Convocation
Day classes begin
End drop/add, day and night classes, 5:00 p.m.
No refund for individual classes dropped after
this date. "I" grades must be changed to
permanent grades.
Last day for late registration
October 6
Last day to drop a class with an automatic "W"
October 1 6
Visiting Day for families of new students
November 12
Last day to drop a class
November 18
Last day of class
November 19
Reading (a.m.)
November
Exams
19,20,22,23,24
November 24
Begin term break, 3:30 p.m.
November 30
Grades due
Winter, 1994
January 2
Residence halls open
January 3
Registration for day and night classes
January 4
Classes begin (day and night)
January 7
End drop/add, day and night classes, 5:00 p.m.
No refund for individual classes dropped after
this date. "\" grades must be changed to
permanent grades.
Last day for late registration.
January 25
Last day to drop a class with an automatic "W"
February 8
Midterm, graduation petitions due for June
graduation
March 1
Last day to drop a class
March 7
Last day of class
March 9,10,11,12
Exams
March 13-20
Spring break
IS
Spring, 1994
March 20
March 21
March 22
March 25
April 1
April 4
April 13
May 2-7
May 7
May 18
May 25
May 27,28,30,31
June 3
June 4
Residence halls open
Registration
Classes begin
End drop/add, day and night classes, 5:00 p.m.
No refund for individual courses dropped after
this date. "\" grades must be changed to
permanent grades.
Last day for registration
Good Friday. Classes end and offices close at
noon
Easter Monday; Faculty Workshop. No day
classes; night classes will meet.
Last day to drop a class with an automatic "W"
Community 1994 - Honors Day; Senior Art Show
May Day; Parents' Day
Last day to drop a class
Last day of class
Exams
Baccalaureate sermon
Graduation
17
About LaGrange College
Purpose
The mission of LaGrange College is to provide a liberating academic en-
vironment in which students and faculty enjoy the adventure of higher learn-
ing. This mission provides a college environment that enables students to
discover and value that which is excellent in life; an environment which
produces graduates prepared to accept responsibility in contemporary society;
and an environment distinguished by a faith in God and by an understanding
of humankind's place in the universe.
Since 1831 many men and women, sustained by their faith in God and in
humankind, have nurtured and promoted LaGrange College. These men and
women have studied, taught, administered and given of their resources so
that the mission of excellent Christian higher education would be realized at
LaGrange College, a college associated with The United Methodist Church
since 1856.
This mission of over 150 years has been the basis of the programs at
LaGrange College. Today the College continues to seek ways to achieve this
mission and fulfill its purpose:
by emphasizing undergraduate education with a firm commitment to
liberal arts. This is done through the strong general education curriculum and
major programs. These major programs are in the liberal arts and sciences as
well as other compatible professional areas.
by offering, where resources permit, academic study in particular areas
specifically in response to current community needs. Currently these programs
include nursing, graduate business administration, graduate teacher educa-
tion, and social work.
by fostering out-of-class enrichment (lectures, plays, exhibits, concerts,
interest and honor groups) and extracurricular activities (intramural and in-
tercollegiate athletics, religious organizations and opportunities, service or-
ganizations, social organizations and student publications).
by promoting healthy guided opportunities for physical activities.
by offering opportunities for inter-cultural experiences in the academic
and social programs.
by striving to maximize student success through a strong academic
support system, counseling and placement services.
by seeking to attract and retain a faculty who are not only highly
competent in their disciplines but who also identify with the mission of the
College.
8 / About LaCrange College
by providing a constructive influence on the local area through con-
tributing intellectual, cultural and social leadership; by offering educational
opportunities to area citizens; and by encouraging faculty, staff and student
participation in local organizations.
by recruiting students who, through scholastic achievement and po-
tential as well as personal motivation, have indicated their desire to undertake
the LaGrange College program.
by striving to increase its resources at a rate which preserves the fi-
nancial well-being of the College, supports existing programs, including Stu-
dent Aid, and facilitates program development to meet changing needs and
to achieve improvements in quality.
Adopted by Faculty, Administration, and Board of Trustees, 1990.
History and Description
The history of LaGrange College is closely associated with the history of the
City of LaGrange and Troup County. When the vast tract of land lying between
the Flint and Chattahoochee Rivers was secured by the Indian Springs Treaty
of 1825 and was opened for settlement in 1827, one of the five counties
formed on the western border of the state was named Troup in honor of
Governor George Michael Troup.
An act was passed by the Georgia Legislature on December 24, 1827,
providing for the selection of a county seat. It was named LaGrange after the
country estate of the Marquis de Lafayette, American Revolutionary War hero
who had visited the region in 1825 as the guest of Governor Troup. The site
for the town of LaGrange was purchased in 1828 and the town was incor-
porated on December 18, 1828. On December 26, 1831, the charter for the
LaGrange Female Academy was granted at the state capitol, then in Milledge-
ville.
In 1831 Andrew Jackson was president of the United States. Abraham
Lincoln was 22 years old. The Creek Indians had been moved out of this area
of the state only six years earlier. The only other college in the state was
Franklin College, now the University of Georgia.
In 1847 the charter for the school was amended and the school became
The LaGrange Female Institute with power to confer degrees. The name was
changed to LaGrange Female College in 1851 and in 1934 it was changed
to LaGrange College. The college became officially coeducational in 1953.
The first location of the school was in a large white building at what is now
406 Broad Street. The school moved to its present location "On The Hill,"
the highest geographical point in LaGrange, after the construction of the build-
ing now known as Smith Hall in 1842.
The College was sold to the Georgia Conference of the Methodist Episcopal
Church South in 1856. Today it is an institution of the North Georgia Con-
ference of The United Methodist Church.
About LaCrange College I 9
Strong in the liberal arts, LaGrange College has an outstanding reputation
in pre-professional programs, including pre-medical and allied fields, pre-law,
pre-theology, and engineering.
LaGrange College offers the Bachelor of Arts degree with twenty-one ma-
jors, the Bachelor of Business Administration with three concentration areas,
and the Bachelor of Science degree in four areas. The Master of Business
Administration degree and the Master of Education degree in Early Childhood
and Middle Childhood are offered. Associate of Arts degree is offered in four
areas.
LaGrange College operates on the quarter system. In addition to the day
schedule of classes in the fall, winter and spring quarters, there is an evening
session. There are also both day and evening sessions in the summer.
The college draws more than half of its student body from Georgia. With
students from more than one-third of the states and from several foreign
countries, the college has a cosmopolitan and international representation
which includes various religious and ethnic backgrounds.
While proud of its heritage, the college continues to add to and improve
its curriculum and facilities to meet the needs of its students today. LaGrange
College originated the plan for students to complete fall quarter before
Thanksgiving and have a 40-day holiday break. Georgia's leader in granting
academic credit through the College Level examination Program, the college
also offers travel seminars, field study programs and internships. The drama
department has a resident summer stock theatre company at Callaway Gar-
dens, nearby resort in Pine Mountain. Students in the college's nursing division
receive supervised learning experiences in many area medical facilties. Cam-
pus art exhibitions, lectures, concerts, varsity and intramural sports add to the
cultural enrichment and recreational opportunities offered by the college.
The college is located in the town of LaGrange, Georgia, which has a
population of 25,597. Nearby are Callaway Gardens, the Warm Springs Foun-
dation and Franklin D. Roosevelt's Little White House. The West Point Dam
on the Chattahoochee River provides one of the largest lakes in the region,
with waterfronts and marina within the city limits of LaGrange.
Accreditation
As a coeducational, four-year liberal arts college, LaGrange College is fully
accredited by the Commission on Colleges of the Southern Association of
Colleges and Schools, approved by the United Methodist University Senate,
and has membership in the National Association of Independent Colleges and
Universities, the National Association of United Methodist Colleges, the Geor-
gia Association of Colleges, The Council for the Advancement and Support of
Education, the Georgia Foundation for Independent Colleges, and the Asso-
ciation of Private Colleges and Universities in Georgia. The Georgia State
10 / About LaGrange College
Board of Education, which confers professional certificates upon college grad-
uates meeting requirements in early childhood, middle school, or secondary
education, has awarded highest approval to LaGrange College's program of
teacher education.
The National League for Nursing, the officially recognized agency for as-
sociate degree nursing programs by the Council on Postsecondary Accredi-
tation, has awarded (highest) accreditation to LaGrange College's nursing
program.
The undergraduate and graduate programs in business administration are
accredited by the Association of Collegiate Business Schools and Programs.
Sessions of the College
The College operates on the quarter system. Each quarter is about ten
weeks long. There are four quarters: fall, winter, spring and summer. In the
summer quarter, day classes and evening classes meet in a seven-week term.
Both day and evening classes are available during each of these four quar-
ters. The day and evening classes are sessions of the same academic program;
however, with the exception of a limited number of majors it is necessary to
attend day classes at some time in order to complete degree requirements.
/11
The LaGrange College
Campus
William and Evelyn Banks Library
Completed in 1963. A modern academic learning center that provides up-
to-date resources to support and enrich the curriculum and to meet infor-
mational needs. The library provides more than 110,000 volumes of books
and bound periodicals, microfilm, microfiche, microcards, filmstrips,. audio-
cassetes and records. Additionally, the library subscribes to eleven newspa-
pers.
The Library is open seven days a week for a total of 77 hours per week,
and is staffed by three professional librarians, four paraprofessional and part-
time assistants, and many student assistants. Group study areas and a seminar
room for meetings are available for student and faculty use. The Library is a
member of the Southeastern Library Network (SOLINET) and the Central
Georgia Associated Libraries Consortium. The library subscribes to the auto-
mated information retrieval system DIALOG. This system enhances the li-
brary's reference information services.
The book collection is strengthened by substantial contributions. The Lucy
Lanier Nixon Fund has been endowed by the Wehadkee Foundation, Inc. in
memory of Mrs. Lucy Lanier Nixon. The Gula Clyde Jinks and Ruth Tarrer
Jinks Collection provides outstanding and necessary additional resources for
the Library. This Collection, established in 1987, is supported by funds given
by the Jinks family.
A service organization, Friends of the LaGrange College Library, supports
the library through the awarding of grants to faculty to support the purchase
of additional library resources. The group also promotes greater cooperation
and communication between the library and the community.
The learning process is enhanced at LaGrange College by the Library's
special services to students and faculty. Reading, reference, and inter-library
loans assistance, by professionally trained librarians, is readily available. The
microforms collection includes the complete New York Times from 1 851 and
many other periodicals. The periodical collection in the library is activated
through the Infotrac CD System.
The Library has recently converted its collection from the Dewey Decimal
System, to the Library of Congress Classification System. The circulation system
has been automated, giving students and faculty access to the full collection
on line. Residence hall rooms along with most faculty offices have access
through fiber optics to the library data base.
The Library has recently installed a local area CD Network. Through this
Network, students and faculty will be able to access important reference and
12/ The LaCrange College Campus
research sources, such as Encyclopedia Brittanica, Academic Abstracts Data
Base and the Silver Platter Data Base. Additionally, the Library is a full member
of the PeachNet-lnternet automated networks.
The Irene W. Melson Room, formerly the Special Collections Room, houses
many first editions. Also included are the Florence Grogan papers and first
editions of outstanding publications of LaGrange College alumni, faculty and
students.
Library named in memory of a former chairman of the LaGrange College
Board of Trustees and his wife.
Cason J. Callaway Science Building
Built in 1972. Three-story brick building with latest equipment for instruc-
tion in general science, biology, chemistry, math, and physics. Named in
memory of a former member of the College's Board of Trustees.
Fuller E. Callaway Student Center
Completed in 1981. Three-story brick building which houses Office of
Student Development, student activities and the campus post office. Named
in memory of Fuller E. Callaway, local philanthropist.
Warren A. Candler Cottage
Completed in 1929 as a home for college president. Building named in
honor of a former Methodist Church Bishop, now deceased.
Lamar Dodd Art Center
Completed in 1982. This building provides a physical environment and the
equipment needed for the finest in art instruction, as well as gallery space for
the college's outstanding art collection. Named in honor of Lamar Dodd,
Georgia artist who was reared in LaGrange and whose paintings have won
international recognition.
Louise Anderson Manget Building
Built in 1959. Contains faculty offices and classrooms. Named in memory
of an 1894-graduate of the college who served more than forty years as a
medical missionary to Hoochow, China, with her husband, Dr. Fred P. Man-
get.
Pitts Hall
Completed in 1941. Two-story brick building. Women's dormitory. A ma-
jor renovation was completed in 1990. Pitts Hall was rededicated in memory
of Mr. and Mrs. W.I.H. Pitts and in honor of their daughter, Miss Margaret
Adger Pitts, a College trustee. The Pitts are long-time supporters of the College.
The LaGrange College Campus/ 13
Price Theater
Completed in 1975. Dramatic arts building with a 280-seat auditorium
that has the latest acoustical concepts. Building houses classrooms for the
Department of Theater Arts and ballet instruction, faculty offices, scenery
workshop, dressing rooms, costume room and actors lounge. Named in mem-
ory of Lewis Price, a long-time member of the College's Board of Trustees.
Quillian Building
Built in 1949. Now houses administrative offices president, academic
dean, registrar, business manager, and the Waights G. Henry, Jr. Collection
on the Marquis de Lafayette. Named in memory of a former president, Hum-
ber T. Quillan, who served from 1938-1948.
Smith Hall
Oldest building on the campus. The main portion of the building was
constructed in 1842 of handmade brick formed from native clay. Addition
was built in 1 887. Major renovation was completed in 1 989 at a cost of over
$2.5 million. Ready for the 21st century, the building now houses offices,
classrooms and seminar rooms for the departments of business administration,
computer science, history and social work, as well as administrative offices
admission, advancement, alumni affairs, financial planning, institutional re-
lations evening studies, The College's computer center and campus books-
tore.
Named in memory of Mrs. Oreon Smith, wife of a former president of the
College, Rufus W. Smith, who served from 1885 until his death in 191 5. The
building is on the National Register of Historic Places.
Sunny Gables
Built in 1926, purchased by College in 1973 as headquarters for College's
Nursing Division. The handsome English Tudor building is located at 910
Broad Street.
The Chapel
Built in 1965. The materials used link it with Christian worship in LaGrange
and other parts of the world and include two stained glass windows made in
Belgium more than 100 years ago; a stone from the temple of Apollo at
Corinth, Greece; a stone from the Benedictine Monastery, lona, Scotland; a
stone from St. George's Chapel, Windsor, England. Regular worship services
are held when the College is in session.
J.K. Boatwright Hall
Completed in 1962. Three-story brick building. Men's dormitory. Named
in memory of long-time member of the College's Board of Trustees and chair-
man of the board's executive committee from 1956-1962.
14 / The LaGrange College Campus
Hawkes Hall
Completed in 1911. The four-story brick building is named in memory of
Mrs. Harriet Hawkes, mother of College benefactor, the late A.K. Hawkes.
After a major renovation costing $1.4 million, the building houses women
students on second, third and fourth floors. Faculty offices and classrooms for
the Education Department occupy the ground floor. The College's Day Clinic
is on the second floor.
Waights G. Henry, Jr. Residence Hall
Completed in 1970. Five-story brick building. Student dormitory. Building
named in honor of Dr. Waights G. Henry, Jr. (now deceased), who served as
president of the College from 1948-1978, and as chancellor from 1978 until
his death in 1989.
William H. Turner Jr. Hall
Built in 1958. Three-story brick building. Women's dormitory. Named in
memory of William H. Turner, Jr., a textile executive of LaGrange who was
a benefactor of the College, a long-time member of the College's Board of
Trustees and chairman of the board's executive committee from 1929-1950.
Alfred Mariotti Gymnasium
Built in 1959. Houses physical education classrooms and facilities for in-
door athletics. Named in memory of Coach Alfred Mariotti, College's basket-
ball coach from 1962-1974 and member of the faculty until his retirement
in 1979.
Dining Hall
Completed in 1962. Two-story brick building that houses dining area and
kitchen. Headquarters for maintenance department on lower level.
Callaway Campus
Acquired by the College in 1 992 as a gift from Callaway Foundation. Cam-
pus includes three buildings of brick and concrete construction.
Callaway Auditorium
Built in 1941 . Building provides space for approximately 2,200 spectators.
It contains a 30 by 46 feet center elevated stage, a basketball court, concession
area with full kitchen, and meeting rooms.
The LaGrange College Campus/ 15
Natatorium
Swimming pool was constructed in 1947 as an oversized pool with di-
mensions of 80 feet by 150 feet. Calla-Cabana and bathhouse building were
built in 1956. This complex is now being modified and equipped for an
academic setting for a year around aquatic program.
Callaway Education Building
Built in 1 965. Main floor of building houses several offices, College's Music
Department - faculty offices, classrooms; exercise room and gymnasium. The
second level has a band practice room, several individual practice rooms and
storage rooms for instruments.
/17
Admission
It is the aim of LaGrange College to admit those students who demonstrate
that they can benefit from a liberal arts education. In the selection of students,
careful attention is given to the academic ability of each candidate.
PROCEDURE FOR APPLYING FOR ADMISSION
An application for admission should be submitted when the student de-
cides he or she would like to attend LaGrange College. The application should
be completed at least one month prior to the beginning of the quarter in
which the entrance is desired. Applicants may enroll any quarter.
Admission Documents Required
Freshmen Transfers
1 . Application form 1 . Application form
2. Application fee 2. Application fee
3. High school transcript 3. Transcripts of all previous college
4. SAT or ACT scores work (transfers with fewer than 45
quarter hours earned must also
submit high school transcripts)
Once all required documents have been submitted, a minimum of two-
three weeks is required to complete the processing of an application. An
applicant will be notified as soon as the Admission Committee has reached a
decision. A student's acceptance is tentative, pending satisfactory completion
of work in progress. LaGrange College must receive notification of successful
completion of such work before acceptance is final.
Once an offer of admission is extended, the candidate is asked to accept
that offer by submitting an admission deposit. The amount of this deposit is
$150 for students who will live on campus, or $50 for students who will live
at home. The $50 deposit will remain on the student's account as a credit
toward the first quarter's tuition. For resident students, the additional $100
will serve as a room reservation deposit and will reserve the student's room
while the student is not occupying college housing. The admission deposit is
fully refundable, provided the student submits a written request to the Office
of Admission by the following dates: July 15 for Fall Quarter, December 15
for Winter Quarter, March 15 for Spring Quarter.
Room reservation deposit is refundable if the student withdraws or when
the student graduates, provided there are not charges against the student at
that time.
Students interested in LaGrange College are invited to visit the campus
and may schedule an appointment by contacting the Admission Office. The
telephone number is 706-812-7260.
1 8 / Admission
ACADEMIC ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the Freshman Class. Prior to enrolling, an applicant is ex-
pected to complete requirements for graduation from an approved high
school.
A total of 15 units is required with a minimum of 11 units within the
following areas:
English 4
Social Studies 3
Mathematics 2
Science 2
LaGrange College students come from a diversity of public and private
secondary school backgrounds. Preference is given to applicants who have
had strong academic preparation in high school. A typical matriculant will
have completed:
English
4
Social Studies
3
College Preparatory Mathematics
(Algebra, Geometry,
Trigonometry, etc.)
3
Science
3
Foreign Language
2
Desirable electives include additional units of Language, Mathematics, or
Science. A basic understanding of Computer Science is also encouraged.
Scores from either the SAT (administered by the College Entrance Exami-
nation Board) or ACT (administered by the American College Testing Program)
are required of all freshman applicants. Test results should normally be sent
to LaGrange College in November, December, or January of the last year in
high school.
Mature students with an irregular educational background may qualify for
admission by achieving satisfactory scores on the tests of General Educational
Development, High School Level.
LaGrange College predicts a student's grade point average using a formula
which takes into account verbal and math scores on the SAT and the student's
high school grade point average. Students are admitted as "clear accept" if
they are predicted to be successful in the academic programs of LaGrange
College.
Clear Accept: The majority of LaGrange College students are accepted
under the clear accept category.
Early Admission: Early admission is possible for students who will have
completed the junior year of high school. To qualify, a student must have a
B + or better high school average in his academic courses, have ten of the
eleven prescribed units, and have a total of fifteen units. Also to qualify, a
Admission / 1 9
student must have a minimum score on the College Board SAT of 1050
combined or a composite score of 25 on the ACT. A minimum of 500 on the
Verbal SAT or a minimum of 24 in the English subject area of the ACT is
desirable. An interview is required of all early admissions students.
Joint Enrollment: Recognizing that there is an increasing number of high
school students beginning their twelfth grade who need only one or two
academic units to graduate and who very often lack sufficient challenge,
LaGrange College has adopted a policy for Joint Enrollment at both the College
and the student's high school. To be eligible, a student must meet the dear-
accept standard of the Admission policy and be recommended in writing by
the proper authority at the student's high school.
On-Trial Program: This program is for applicants who are unable to qualify
for dear-accept admission to LaGrange College, but who appear to have the
potential to succeed. All courses taken are for full credit. Students in this
program must earn a grade point average of 1.6 during the first quarter of
college work. Further information is available from the Director of Admission.
Transfer Students: A student who has been in attendance at another
institution may apply for transfer to LaGrange College if he or she is eligible
to return to that institution at the time of entry to LaGrange College. A student
may be accepted on probation under the standard probation regulations. All
records including transcripts of all college work attempted, must be complete
before the student is admitted to LaGrange College. Applicants may enroll at
the beginning of any quarter. LaGrange College does not accept D grades.
Acceptable credit from a junior college is limited to 1 00 quarter hours. Credits
from senior colleges beyond 145 quarter hours may be accepted, but the
LaGrange College residency requirement, the general education curriculum,
and appropriate major coursework must be satisfied.
LaGrange College is accredited by the Commission of Colleges of the South-
ern Association of Colleges and Schools and, accordingly, accepts coursework
from similarly regionally accredited colleges and universities.
Transient Students: Students currently enrolled in good standing at an-
other college, may enroll at LaGrange College as transient students. Approval
of course work must be authorized by the primary institution on the Appli-
cation for Transient Status which is available from the Admission Office.
Non-degree Undergraduate Students: Students not working toward a
degree may register as non-degree undergraduate students in any course for
which they have the necessary prerequisites. An application for non-degree
undergraduate student status may be obtained through the Admission Office.
Students classed as non-degree undergraduate students may become regular
students by meeting requirements for regular admission. No more than ten
credit hours may be earned under this classification.
Readmission Students: Following an absence from LaGrange College of
four or more quarters during the academic year, any student who decides to
20 / Admission
return must submit an Application for Readmission. This form is available
from the Admission Office. Students who have been absent from LaGrange
College for three quarters or less may re-activate their file in the Registrar's
Office. These students do not need to apply for readmission.
In the event that a student seeking readmission has attended another in-
stitution as a transfer (not transient) then that student when readmitted is
treated as a new transfer student and is subject to the Bulletin in force at the
time of transfer back to LaGrange. On the other hand, students who have
not attended another institution are generally governed by the catalog in force
at the time of their initial admission. An exception is that students who have
been out of school for four calendar years or more re-enter under the Bulletin
in force at the time of readmission and resumption of study.
International Students: Admission as an international student requires a
TOEFL examination with a minimum score of 500 for students for whom
English is not their first language. Documentation of completion of the 109
level from one of the ELS Language Centers may be substituted for the TOEFL
requirement. Also required are translated and certified documents attesting
to academic performances in secondary school and university, if applicable.
The Director of Admission should be contacted for the current interpretation
of the regulations concerning obtaining a student visa. If the prospective stu-
dent is in the United States, an interview at the College is desirable and may
often be substituted for a TOEFL score.
ADMISSION TO NURSING PROGRAM
The nursing program functions within the general admission policy of the
College and has several additional requirements:
1. SAT scores (minimum Verbal 400 and Mathematics 350).
2. Two letters of reference, one from an educator or employer, and
one from a personal acquaintance.
3. Satisfactory completion of any remedial courses required by the
College prior to beginning the first nursing course.
4. A minimum GPA of 2.0 for any previously completed college stud-
ies.
An Interview with a member of the nursing faculty may also be required.
Information regarding these requirements will be mailed to the student fol-
lowing acceptance by the College.
A nursing course completed in another nursing program, with a grade of
75% or higher, may qualify for transfer credit depending upon course content.
An audit of specified courses may be required for transfer students. Contact
the Nursing office for complete information.
Advanced placement by testing or through a transition course is available
for licensed practical nurses. Further information regarding advanced place-
ment may be obtained from the Nursing Office.
/21
Financial Information
Payment of Charges
All charges for the quarter are due and payable at registration, and
each student is expected to pay at that time.
Students who pre-register and pay in advance of the deadline each quarter
are not required to attend final registration.
LaCrange College has no plan for making monthly or deferred payments.
Realizing that some families prefer to pay charges on a monthly basis, the
College has made arrangements with Academic Management Services to offer
interested parents this type service. The plan is an agreement between the
parent and the company; there is no involvement by LaGrange College in the
agreement. For additional information, contact the Director of Financial Aid.
Expenses
1. Admission
Application for Admission (not refundable) $ 20.00
2. Tuition
A. (1)(undergraduate) per quarter hour 137.00
(2)Normal Load (17 Hrs.), per quarter 2329.00
(3)Nursing (NSG) Courses per quarter hour 160.00
(4)Graduate (MBA, MED) Courses per quarter hour 160.00
B. Private Lesson Fees (in addition to tuition charge)
Piano - (2 hrs. credit) per quarter 200.00
Voice - (2 hrs. credit) per quarter* 200.00
Guitar - (2 hrs. credit) per quarter 200.00
Composition/Arranging (2 hrs. credit) per quarter 200.00
C. General Fees Required of Every Student Enrolled
(1) less than 12 hours 30.00
(2) 12 hours and over 70.00
D. Course Fees Select Courses
Science Lab 55.00
Computer Science, Business Administration 440 40.00
Nursing Lab, per lab credit hour 15.00
English 010 180.00
Students enrolled in MUS 206 and 306 may take MUS 240 without tuition.
22 / Financial Information
E. Summer Quarter
Summer Quarter charges are listed in the Summer
Quarter brochure. Students may write for information
regarding offerings and charges.
F. Audit (per quarter hour) $ 60.00
All requests for audit courses must be approved by
the instructor and Academic Dean. No freshman stu-
dent may audit any course during his first quarter at
LaCrange College.
3. Room and Board (per quarter) Henry, Pitts and Hawkes 1160.00
Boatwright and Turner 1 1 35.00
(Note: All students living in dormitories are required to pay
room and board.)
4. Private rooms are available at additional charge: 200.00
After the beginning of the quarter any student occupying a
double room alone will be charged single rates. If a student
occupying a double room alone does not wish to pay the pri-
vate room rate, it is that student's responsibility to find a suit-
able roommate. Willingness to accept a roommate will not
constitute grounds for waiving the single room charge.
5. Fees Miscellaneous
Graduation (Regardless of Participation) Undergraduate 40.00
Graduate 80.00
Late Registration 20.00
Personal checks failing to clear bank 1 5.00
Student Identification Card Replacement Fee 5.00
Documents Fee (International Students) 150.00
Parking Permit 15.00
Testing Fee (All New Students) 60.00
Room Deposit 100.00
Admission Deposit (new students) 50.00
Financial Information/ 23
Summary of Standard Charge
Non-Dormitory Students:
Per Quarter
Per Year
Tuition, Undergrad.,
Non-Nursing
$2329.00
$6987.00
General Fees
70
210
2399.00
7197
Pitts
Boatwright
Hawkes
and
Dormitory Students
Henry
Turner
Tuition
2329.00
2329.00
6987.00
General Fees
70.00
70.00
210.00
Room and Board
1160.00
1135.00
3405.00
3559.00
3534.00
10602.00
All LaGrange College undergraduate degree-seeking students taking 1 2 hours
or more who have been residents of the state of Georgia for twelve consec-
utive months are eligible to receive a tuition equalization grant regardless of
need. The amount of this grant for 1993-94 is expected to be $1000.00.
Freshmen and sophomores are to receive a second tier Tuition Equalization
Grant of $500 from Georgia's HOPE Grant program. State of Georgia Tuition
Grants MUST be applied for at registration in order to be processed within
the time limit set by the State. Failure to apply on time means the student
will not receive the State Tuition Grant and will personally have to pay the
amount of the grant.
Depending on individual requirements, a student may expect to spend
$750.00 to $1000.00 per year on books and personal expenses.
The above charges are applicable to an academic year of three quarters
duration.
Summer Quarter costs and curriculum are available in a separate bulletin.
Nursing students should consult with the Nursing Division concerning re-
quired nursing supplies and their projected costs.
All students must present proof of health insurance at the time of registra-
tion. If the student has no insurance, the college will make a charge for limited
coverage group sickness and accident insurance.
Transcripts of grades are withheld for any student who has a financial
obligation to LaGrange College.
24 / Financial Information
Refund Policy
No refund of charges of any nature will be made to any student who is
suspended or dismissed for disciplinary reasons.
No refunds will be made for courses dropped after dates established by
the school calendar.
In the event of complete withdrawal horn college after registration, refund
of tuition will be made from date of registration to date of official withdrawal
on the following basis:
Regular
Graduate
7-Week
School Year
Summer
Summer
Withdrawal
% Refund
% Refund
% Refund
During Drop/Add
100
100
100
Within 14 days
80
40
60
Within 21 days
60
No refund
40
Within 28 days
40
No refund
After 28 days
No refund
No refund for room or board will be made to any student who withdraws
from the dormitory after registration. For a student withdrawing from college,
a charge of $15.00 per day from date of registration to date of official with-
drawal will be made in board.
There is no refund of room deposit if student does not enroll.
A separate refund policy exists for new first quarter students (freshmen and
transfers) who receive Title IV (federal) financial assistance as required by the
Higher Education Amendments of 1992. Information is available in the Fi-
nancial Planning Office.
Students eligible for the State of Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant must
be enrolled for a minimum of 14 days after the drop/add period to receive
credit for the grant.
The College will not be responsible for loss of or damage to students'
personal property.
I 25
Financial Planning
Philosophy
LaGrange College believes that the student and family should contribute
to the educational expenses of attending college to the extent of their ability
to do so. When family resources do not meet the total costs of attending this
institution, a financial need is established. We at LaGrange College will do all
we can to assist you in meeting that need. The student should be prepared
to assume a measure of responsibility through limited work or through bor-
rowing a reasonable portion of any financial need. Foreign students are not
eligible for scholarships or financial aid unless they hold permanent residency
status. All aid is awarded without regard to race, sex, sexual preference, creed,
color or national origin.
General Information
Financial need is the difference between the total educational costs and
the amount the family can contribute. The family contribution is determined
by using a standard need analysis system. The Free Application for Federal
Student Aid (FAFSA) and the Financial Aid Form Supplement (FAF) are the
preferred need analysis documents. The Free Application for Federal Student
Aid must be completed by all students and allows the applicant to apply for
federal and state programs. The Financial Aid Form Supplement is optional.
Students who wish to be considered for LaGrange College's institutional grants
and work programs in addition to the federal and state programs should
complete this supplement.
Applicants for financial assistance need not be accepted for admission to
apply. However, the student must be accepted for enrollment before an
official aid award can be made. Financial aid awards are made for each
academic year. Therefore, students must complete a need analysis each
year.
Procedure for Applying for Financial Aid
1. Apply for admission to the college through the Admission Office.
2. Submit the FAFSA and FAF supplement to the processor for processing
as soon as possible after January 1. This form may be obtained from
high school counselors or the Office of Student Financial Planning at
the College. Students whose financial aid file is completed by May 1st
get preference for aid. Students completing files after that deadline will
receive grant assistance if funds are available.
26 / Financial Planning
3. Submit the LaGrange College Financial Aid Application to the Office
of Student Financial Planning. This form is available upon request.
4. All Georgia residents should complete and submit the Georgia Student
Grant Application for the Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant to the
Office of Student Financial Planning. This form is available only from
private colleges in Georgia. It may be completed in advance of regis-
tration or at registration but no later than the last day of late registration.
5. Transfer students requesting assistance must submit a Financial Aid
Transcript (FAT) from all post-secondary institutions previously attended
whether or not financial assistance was received. These forms may be
obtained by contacting the Office of Student Financial Planning or the
institutions previously attended.
Determination of Eligibility for Need-Based
Assistance
The College annually prepares a cost of attendance budget which is com-
posed of tuition and fees, room and board, books and supplies, transportation
and miscellaneous expenses. The expected family contribution (EFC) as de-
termined by the processed Need Analysis document is subtracted from the
appropriate budget and the remainder is unmet need. The Office of Student
Financial Planning then prepares a financial aid award based on this unmet
need. Funds are awarded to students as their financial aid file is completed.
Budgets for 93-94:
Undergraduates residing in the dormitories 12,366
Undergraduates residing with parents 10,386
Undergraduates residing elsewhere 1 7,01 6
Nursing students residing in the dormitories 14,235
Nursing students residing with parents 12,255
Nursing students residing elsewhere 1 8,885
Graduate students residing in the dormitories 10,270
Graduate students residing with parents 8,590
Graduate students residing elsewhere 14,920
RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF A FINANCIAL AID RECIPIENT
Student Eligibility
In general, to be eligible for student financial assistance you must:
A. Be a U.S. citizen or permanent resident of the United States.
B. Be accepted for admission or currently enrolled in an approved degree-
seeking program at the College.
Financial Planning/ 27
C. Be making Satisfactory Academic Progress toward the completion of
your course of study according to the "Academic Probation Regula-
tions" and "Satisfactory Academic Progress" policies published in the
LaGrange College Bulletin.
D. Not be in default on a Federal Perkins Loan/National Direct Student
Loan or any of the Federal Family Education Loan Programs, i.e., Fed-
eral Subsidized Stafford Loan (Guaranteed Student Loan), Federal Un-
subsidized Stafford Loan, Federal Supplemental Loans for Students, or
a Federal Parent Loan for Undergraduate Students.
E. Not owe a refund on Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity
Grant or Federal Pell Grant received at any institution.
F. Not have borrowed in excess of the loan limits under Title IV programs
at any institution.
Student Financial Aid Policy
Each year the Office of Student Financial Planning receives request for
more funds than are available. First priority for assistance awarded goes to
eligible students who are enrolled full-time in pursuit of the first baccalaureate
degree. Students who are enrolled at least half-time are eligible for assistance.
Special students (those not enrolled in a degree seeking program), transient
students and unclassified graduate students are not eligible for any type of
assistance.
Students who received aid awarded by the College during the academic
year will be given preference for summer awards contingent upon availability
of funds.
Students who receive academic scholarships are not required to complete
a "need analysis" document although all students are encouraged to do so.
All undergraduate Georgia residents must apply for the State Student In-
centive Grant and the Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant.
Any aid that a student receives or expects to receive from any outside
source must be reported to the Office of Student Financial Planning. This
includes scholarships, grants, and loans. The receipt of such aid may result in
a reduction, cancellation, and/or repayment of your need based assistance.
Disbursement of Funds
Federal Pell Grant, Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant,
Federal Perkins Loan, Georgia Tuition Equalization Grant, Academic Schol-
arships, State Incentive Grant and Institutional Grants are automatically cred-
ited against the student's charges and are reflected on the charge sheet at
registration. Perkins Loan recipients must sign a promissory note at registration
and complete an initial interview questionnaire.
Funds from the Federal Family Education Loan programs come to the
College in the form of a check payable to the student and sometimes the
College. Recipients must sign a copy of the check to receive loan proceeds
28 / Financial Planning
and first time borrowers must complete a counseling form prior to disburse-
ment. Loan proceeds for first time first year borrowers will be held for the
first 30 days of the enrollment period.
PLUS loan checks are made co-payable and mailed directly to the school
for disbursement. LaGrange College does not provide initial endorsement of
these loan proceeds. The check is mailed to the parent borrower for endorse-
ment in addition to an options form for disposition of residual funds not
attributable to the current school term.
All work programs are paid monthly directly to the student. Payroll checks
are mailed to the student's campus post office box on the 10th of the sub-
sequent month. Exception: a student who owes a balance at the Business
Office must collect their check from the Business Office.
Determination of Placement for Employment
Students are first assigned employment in their designated choice of po-
sitions until such time as all those positions are filled; placements are then
assigned according to the need of other departments and areas on campus
requesting student assistance.
Off Campus Employment
Local businesses employ students in part-time positions. Such employment
is usually arranged by the student and not the College. The Office of Career
Planning and Placement maintains current job opportunity information and
can advise students concerning employment opportunities and responsibili-
ties.
Responsibilities of Financial Aid Recipients
1 . You must get a campus post office box (there is no charge).
2. You must let the Office of Student Financial Planning know any time
that you drop classes, or fail to enroll as a full time student (1 2 or more
- hours).
3. You must notify the Office of Student Financial Planning any time you
change your living arrangements from that which you designated on
the Need Analysis document you originally filed (if you move home,
move on campus, or if you move elsewhere).
4. You must notify the Office of Student Financial Planning of changes in
your household size and number in post-secondary institutions at any
time during the award year when said changes occur.
5. You must notify the Office of Financial Planning if you plan to withdraw
from school or transfer.
6. You must complete an exit interview for Federal Family Education Loan
Programs prior to graduation, withdrawal, or transferring.
Financial Planning/ 29
7. You must provide in a timely manner any additional information re-
quested by the Office of Student Financial Planning.
8. You must make Satisfactory Academic Progress to maintain eligibility
for financial assistance.
Work Aid and Federal College Work Study Rights and Responsibilities
1 . Job assignments are available in the Office of Student Financial Planning
the day after registration. You must come by personally to get your
assignment.
2. Earnings from work are not credited at registration. Time sheets are
due on the last working day of the month. There is no penalty for
failure to work your hours, except that you are not compensated for
hours not worked. Payroll is run monthly.
3. In accepting assistance from either work program you are agreeing to
perform satisfactory work as determined by your supervisor. An annual
evaluation is filed with the Office of Student Financial Planning.
4. Scheduling of hours will be mutually agreed upon by both the student
and the supervisor as determined by the quarterly class schedule and
work load of the office.
5. Transfers from one position to another will be done at the supervisor's
request. Transfers due to unsatisfactory work habits can result in loss
of eligibility for either work program.
6. Unexcused absences from work will not be tolerated. Three unexcused
absences can result in termination of eligibility. You should always notify
your superior when an absence is necessary, in advance, if possible, so
your position can be covered.
7. You are not allowed to work more than the number of assigned hours
if you do, you will not be compensated.
8. Recipients of work must complete a W-4 federal withholding form and
an I-9 form with the college Business Office.
Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy
The Higher Education Act of 1965, as amended by Congress in 1980 and
1986, requires that a student be maintaining Satisfactory Academic Progress
in their course of study in order to receive any Title IV financial aid. Satisfac-
tory progress will be implemented throughout the entire course of study prior
to and including periods when a student receives Title IV aid or state aid.
The minimum academic progress requirements for all students, whether
or not they are receiving Title IV aid or state aid, are those academic require-
ments imposed by LaGrange College as stated in the LaGrange College Bul-
letin section titled "Academic Probation Regulations." Academic probation
or suspension are the same for enrollment as for financial aid eligibility. (If a
student is allowed to continue enrollment on probation they continue eligi-
bility to receive financial aid; if they are suspended from enrollment their
30 / Financial Planning
future eligibility for financial aid is terminated). The Dean of the College is
charged with the responsibility of monitoring this part of the Satisfactory Ac-
ademic Progress Policy. Once the determination of enrollment eligibility is
assessed, the Dean follows with a memo to the Office of Student Financial
Planning showing those students who have been suspended from enrollment.
This part of the policy is monitored quarterly. A student must have a 2.0
cumulative GPA at the end of the second year (regardless of course load) or
that which is consistent with the institution's policy governing academic prog-
ress. LaGrange's policy requires a 1.65 at the end of the 1st year, a 1 .75 at
the end of the 2nd year, a 1 .85 at the end of the 3rd year and a 2.0 at the
end of the 4th year. The policy of the institution will be the deciding factor
in assessing Satisfactory Academic Progress.
Beyond those minimum requirements, there are some others for Title IV
aid recipients and the recipients of the Georgia's grant programs. Title IV aid
programs are Federal Pell Grant, Federal Supplemental Educational Oppor-
tunity Grant, Federal College Work Study, Federal Perkins Loan, Federal Staf-
ford Loans, Federal PLUS/SLS. Georgia's grant programs are the State Student
Incentive Grant and the State Tuition Equalization Grant.
If a student accepts aid from any program listed above, the student must
earn at least the following number of cumulative credits based on full-time
status (17 hours per quarter to be on schedule for graduation in 4 years)
according to the following sequence of academic quarters:
At the end
You must have earned a
of Quarter
minimum number of hours
3
30
6
65
9
115
12
155
15
195
This means that students who drop courses, withdraw frequently, fail to
complete courses (incompletes), repeat courses, or take courses not related
to their degree objective would not be considered to be making Satisfactory
Academic Progress as they would not graduate within the specified 1 5 quarter
time frame. LaGrange College does not offer non-credit remedial courses.
TO MAINTAIN ELIGIBILITY FOR TITLE IV FEDERAL AID PROGRAMS OR
STATE PROGRAMS A STUDENT MUST MEET ALL THREE (3) CRITERIA SPEC-
IFIED: GRADE POINT AVERAGE, MINIMUM NUMBER OF HOURS EARNED,
AND BE WITHIN THE 15 QUARTER TIME FRAME.
Students who do not meet the Academic Probation Regulations of the
institution, i.e. are suspended, do not earn the number of hours required or
who exceed the time frame will have all sources of federal and state assistance
terminated at the time that such determination has been made.
Financial Planning/ 31
Students who have their financial aid terminated may have their aid rein-
stated pending approval by the Office of Student Financial Planning Appeals
Committee and the availability of funds at that time.
Students who are part-time have a maximum of a 15 quarters equivalent
of full time enrollment (part-time quarters are added to make full time quar-
ters). Because of aggregate (lifetime) loan limits a student needs to be aware
that they may exhaust lifetime Federal Stafford loan limits prior to receiving
a degree. Additional information on Satisfactory Academic Progress for part-
time students is available from the Office of Student Financial Planning.
This policy is monitored quarterly for suspensions and time frame, and
annually for the minimum number of hours required. The GPA requirement
(since it is the same as the Academic Probation Policy of the Institution) will
be monitored by suspending aid for those students who are suspended from
the institution by the Academic Dean. The time frame and number of hours
earned will be monitored by the Director of the Office of Student Financial
Planning utilizing the academic records of the College to insure that the stu-
dent has earned the required number of hours per the specified time incre-
ment (3 quarters).
Conditions of Reinstatement
The Financial Aid Appeals Committee may set specific terms for re-attaining
eligibility which may include a student's paying his/her own expenses for a
specified time or for a specified number of hours. Any special terms for
readmission to the College will also play a part in re-establishing eligibility. It
will be the responsibility of the student to notify the Financial Aid Office once
any special requirements have been met.
Appeal Procedure
A student may appeal the denial of aid (with the exception of the fifteen
quarter time limit) if mitigating circumstances have occurred. This appeal
should be submitted in writing to the Director of the Office of Student Fi-
nancial Planning who will submit the appeal before a Financial Aid Appeals
Committee. (This letter of appeal should include (a) reason for failure to meet
whichever requirement was not met and (b) reasons why aid should not be
terminated.) The Committee, for purpose of hearing the appeal, shall convene
within two weeks of the date of receipt of the written appeal and shall inform
the Director of their decision in writing who will then inform the student of
the decision within one week of the hearing.
32 / Financial Planning
FEDERAL TAX LAW
The Tax Reform Act of 1986 contained provisions regarding the federal
income tax treatment of scholarships and grants. If a student receives schol-
arships or grants from LaGrange College or any other source, that student
should be aware of the following:
Under the law, only qualified scholarships or grants may be excluded from
the recipient's gross income.
Qualified scholarships or grants are amounts awarded to degree seeking
candidates and used for tuition, required fees, books, supplies and equipment
required for courses of instruction. If the award specifies that any portion of
the scholarship or fellowship may not be used for these described expenses
or if it designates any portion of the award for purposes other than those
expenses just described (room, board, transportation, or living expenses),
those designated amounts are not qualified scholarships or grants. Awards in
excess of the described expenses are to be included in the recipient's gross
income (an unearned income).
Included within the definition of scholarships and grants and thus possibly
subject to taxation, are scholarships and grants awarded on the basis of aca-
demic merit, talent, financial need or any other factors; state and federal
grants, including Pell Grant; athletic grant-in-aid; and tuition remissions or
reductions (resident assistant grant). Awards may come from LaGrange Col-
lege, from state or federal agencies, or from private organizations.
Any cost related to room and board for which the student receives financial
aid in the form of a grant or scholarship will be fully taxable. Resident Assistant
and SIMS Scholarship recipients will be affected by these provisions.
It is important that the student keep copies of documents which will es-
tablish the amounts of scholarships and the amount paid for tuition, required
fees, books, supplies and course- related equipment. Records might include
award letter from the Office of Student Financial Planning, check stubs from
scholarships, charge sheets from registration, receipts from the Business Office
and receipts for the purchase of books, supplies and equipment.
Neither LaGrange College nor any other awarding agency is required to
report scholarships or grants to the Internal Revenue Service; reporting of
such income for tax purposes is the sole responsibility of the recipient.
Estimated Tax:
The grantor of a grant or scholarship does not withhold taxes. With no
withholding the student may be liable for the payment of estimated taxes.
Generally, you must make estimated tax payments if your estimated tax pay-
ment will be $550 or more for the tax year. If you do not pay enough
estimated tax you may have to pay a penalty.
This information is not intended as tax advice and the student is encour-
aged to seek the assistance of a tax advisor.
Financial Planning/ 33
For more information pertaining to the taxability of grants and scholarships
the student may wish to order publication 520 from the Internal Revenue
Service. The address is P.O. Box 25866, Richmond, VA 23289.
Verification of Financial Aid Application Data
Verification is the process by which the Office of Student Financial Planning
checks reported application data against appropriate documents utilized to
complete the Need Analysis form.
Federal regulations require that we verify at least 30% of the applications
that we receive. Those selected are those specified by the processor which
are determined by a federal edit check system. We also reserve the right to
verify any application not selected by the edit system.
No financial aid award will be made nor loan application certified until
the verification process has been completed.
DOCUMENTS THAT MAY BE REQUIRED ARE:
1 . Federal tax returns for both the student and the parent for the previous
tax year (W-2 forms issued by employers are not tax returns).
2. Year-end documents or written certification issued by the Social Se-
curity Administration regarding annual amount of benefits paid to a
household.
3. Divorce decrees or proof of legal separation for married students.
4. A written statement that parents will not claim an independent student
or graduate student for the subsequent tax year.
5. Documents showing the amount of child support received in the house-
hold of a divorced or separated student or parent.
6. Documents showing the amount of child support paid out for other
households in cases of divorce or separation.
7. A list of family members including age and post-secondary institution
of each family member of the applicant.
8. Any source of income not reported on the tax return.
9. Benefits paid from the Department of Family and Children Services for
Aid to Families to Dependent Children.
10. A notarized statement that no tax return was filed and that no income
from work was earned.
Deadlines for Submitting Verification Documents
LaGrange College's Office of Student Financial Planning will notify the
applicant, upon receipt of the processed need analysis document, if specific
documents are required. If no documents are required the applicant will
receive an official award notification. Documents must be received at the
College within 30 days of notification or no award will be processed.
34 / Financial Planning
Correction of Need Analysis Data
If errors are detected during the verification process, corrections for all
programs with the exception of Pell Grant will be done in-house on the PC;
errors on Pell Grant Student Aid Report documents will be made and returned
to the applicant for appropriate signatures and mailing instructions to get
corrections made.
Referrals
If an institution has reason to believe that the information on an application
is incorrect and has made a determined but unsuccessful effort to resolve the
problems, the institution may refer the case to the Department of Education.
Suspected Fraud
Institutions are required to refer applicants who may have engaged in fraud
or other criminal misconduct in connection with the aid application to the
Office of the Inspector General of the Department of Education, or, if more
appropriate, to a State or local law enforcement agency having jurisdiction to
investigate the matter. Fraud may exist if the institution has reason to suspect:
false claims of independent student status;
false claims of citizenship or eligible noncitizen status;
use of false identities
forgery of signatures or certifications;
false certification (e.g., Drug-Free Workplace, educational purpose);
and
false statements of income.
a pattern of mis-reported information from one year to the next.
unreported prior loans or grants, and receipt of concurrent full grants
during one award year.
REFUND AND REPAYMENT POLICIES
REFUND POLICY: The refund policy for students withdrawing is outlined in
the catalog under "Refund of Fees" and ranges from 100% the first 7 days
of classes to 40% through the 28th day of class. A separate refund policy exists
for first quarter students (new freshmen or transfers) who receive Federal Title
IV assistance as required by the Higher Education Amendments of 1992.
Information is available in the Office of Student Financial Planning.
Georgia residents receiving credit for Tuition Equalization Grant must be con-
tinuously enrolled for 14 days beyond drop/add to receive the funds. Course
drops reducing courseload below 12 hours will result in the loss of these
funds.
Financial Planning/ 35
Students on financial aid will not receive refunds until funds representing
financial aid awards have been applied back to the respective accounts. Re-
funds will be returned to the programs in the order indicated in the "Allo-
cation Policy" below.
LaGrange College does not advance any funds to students prior to the date
of registration for that period of enrollment.
Financial aid is considered to be used first for direct educational costs
tuition and fees, room and board, if in College housing. Therefore, if a student
withdraws and is scheduled to receive a refund of tuition and fees, funds will
be returned to the appropriate program(s) from which the student receives
funds and the balance to the student.
Students who receive case disbursements on or after registration for that en-
rollment period will be assessed liability for repayment of the appropriate
percentage of the refund due the Title IV programs upon withdrawal, expul-
sion, or suspension.
REPAYMENT POLICY: Some programs have specific repayment provisions for
students who withdraw. If the refund is insufficient to cover the required
repayment, it will be the responsibility of the student to make the necessary
repayment.
A student owing a repayment to any federally-sponsored student aid program
cannot receive any type of federally-supported student aid disbursement for
future enrollment periods unless repayment arrangements have been made
with the Office of Student Financial Planning.
ALLOCATION POLICY
1st to Federal Family Education Loan Programs (FFELP)
2nd to Federal Direct Loans
3rd to Federal Perkins
4th to Federal Pell
5th to Federal SEOG
6th to Other Title IV Programs
7th to State Programs
8th to Institutional Grants
9th to Student/Family
LOAN REPAYMENT
Student Loans are a form of financial assistance that must be repaid at some
specified time in the future:
FEDERAL STAFFORD LOAN: has a six month grace period; interest rates are
variable capped at 9% for "new borrowers." A new borrower is someone
who has not previously borrowed from a Federal Family Education Loan
36 / Financial Planning
Program. Old borrowers' interest rates will remain the same as under previous
loans. For most loans, the maximum repayment is 10 years.
FEDERAL PERKINS LOANS: have a six month grace period; interest rate is
5% for the duration of repayment. The maximum repayment is 10 years.
There is no penalty for pre-payment on any Federal Family Education Loan
Program or Federal Perkins during the grace period.
SAMPLE REPAYMENT SCHEDULE WITH APPROPRIATE INTEREST RATES
Based on 120 months (10 year) repayment schedule
Amount Borrowed
Payments
at Various Rates
5%
7%
8%
9%
10%
$500
$40
$50
$50
$50
$50
1000
40
50
50
50
50
1500
40
50
50
50
50
2000
40
50
50
50
50
2500
40
50
50
50
50
3000
40
50
50
50
50
3500
40
50
50
50
50
4000
42
50
50
51
53
4500
47
54
57
59
60
5000
53
58
61
63
66
5500
58
64
67
70
73
6000
63
70
73
76
79
6500
68
76
79
82
86
7000
74
82
85
89
93
7500
79
87
91
95
100
8000
84
93
97
101
106
8500
89
100
103
107
113
9000
95
105
109
114
119
9500
100
111
115
120
125
10000
106
116
121
127
132
Resources of Financial Aid
SCHOLARSHIPS
All students who are accepted for admission to LaCrange College are in-
cluded in the applicant pool from which scholarship recipients are selected.
LaGrange College does not award athletic scholarships for any athletic pro-
gram. Academic scholarship recipients are notified in early spring regarding
awards and award amount for the subsequent school year. All correspondence
regarding scholarships should be with the Director of the Office of Student
Financial Planning and never with the donors.
Financial Planning/ 37
Endowed Scholarships
The College has available, through the generosity of individuals, corpora-
tions, and foundations a number of endowed scholarships which are admin-
istered by the Office of Student Financial Planning. These endowed
scholarships are listed below:
THE SARAH QUILLIAN BALDWIN SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established
in 1978 by Mr. and Mrs. Robert M. Turnell, other family and friends. Mrs.
Baldwin is an alumna, class of 1901.
THE WILLIAM HENRY BELK SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1972
through the efforts of Mr. James G. Gallant and is awarded annually with
special consideration to Presbyterian students or graduates of Rabun-Gap Na-
coochee School.
THE CYNTHIA MAUDE BIRDSONG THOMPSON MEMORIAL SCHOL-
ARSHIP was established in 1990 by the Reverend Julian Frank Thompson
and his widow Mrs. Ruby Oakley Thompson in memory of the Reverend
Thompson's mother who attended LaGrange College from 1 896 to 1 898. This
fund will provide annual scholarships to deserving students who are of good
character, show academic promise and who need financial assistance to at-
tend LaGrange College.
THE J.K. BOATWRIGHT, JR. SCHOLARSHIP is awarded annually in mem-
ory of J.K. Boatwright, Jr., a long time trustee and friend of the college. The
scholarship is awarded to students with good character who demonstrate
academic promise with preference to business and accounting majors who
have financial need.
THE ROSA WRIGHT BOYD SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1989 by
Mr. John W. Boyd, Sr., in his will, to memorialize his mother Mrs. Rosa Wright
Boyd, an 1898 alumna. These scholarship funds will be awarded to deserving
students who need assistance to attend LaGrange College.
THE BUCHHEIDT SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1 962 through
initial gifts from the Public Welfare Foundation, Washington, D.C. to assist
students in receiving an education.
THE CAROLYN DRINKARD BURGESS SCHOLARSHIP FUND was estab-
lished in 1 990 through gifts of alumni, friends and family of Mrs. Burgess upon
her retirement from the College after 30 years of service.
THE FLORA GLENN CANDLER SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1977
by Mr. Charles Howard Candler, Jr. in memory of his mother Mrs. Flora Glenn
Candler, a 1898 alumna of the College and the daughter of a Methodist
minister, the late Reverend Wilbur Fisk Glenn.
THE JOSEPHINE A. CASE ART SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1980.
Preference is given to a junior for excellence in art scholarship and promise
38 / Financial Planning
by "achievement" in that field. It was established by Mrs. J. A. Case and her
husband Leland D. Case.
THE THOMAS WOODWARD CLIFTON ENDOWED SCHOLARSHIP was
established by the Board of Trustees of Walter Clifton Foundation, Inc., a
Georgia nonprofit corporation ("Foundation") in 1989 in memory of Mr.
Thomas W. Clifton in light of his emphasis placed on the support of education.
The recipient shall be selected based on qualifications in the areas of aca-
demics, character, involvement in meaningful extra-curricular activities and
need for financial aid.
THE COKES CHAPEL MEN'S CLUB SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1983 by the Men's Club of the First United Methodist Church of Sharpsburg,
Georgia.
THE WELBORN B. CODY - COOK BARWICK SCHOLARSHIP FUND
was established in 1990 through gifts of Mrs. Welborn B. Cody in memory of
her late husband and Mr. Barwick, a former Trustee of LaGrange College.
THE JEANETTE STRICKLAND COOK SCHOLARSHIP was established by
the will of Mr. Benjamin Lane Cook in 1987. The scholarship is to benefit a
teacher in the LaGrange School System or the Troup County School System
who desires to further his/her education at LaGrange College.
THE EVELYN COPELAN ENDOWED SCHOLARSHIP FUND was estab
lished in 1990 in memory of Miss Copelan, class of 1931, by her sister, Mary
Helen Copelan, class of 1935.
THE ADELIA MEYERS CORBIN SCHOLARSHIP was established in mem-
ory of Mrs. Floyd Steward Corbin (Adelia Meyers), alumna, to provide schol-
arships for young ladies of character, ability, and need, with special
consideration to students from Augusta, Georgia.
THE KATE HOWARD CROSS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1981 by
Virginia F. Prettyman of Chapel Hill, NC to honor Kate Howard Cross, Pro-
fessor of Latin at LaGrange College. Preference is given to history and English
majors.
THE EMILY FISHER CRUM SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
1983 by Mr. and Mrs. Remer H. Crum of Atlanta. Mrs. Crum is an alumna,
class of 1935.
THE ESTELLE JONES CULPEPPER SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1 978
by Dolly Jones House, class of 1 91 5. Preference is given to students preparing
for the ministry in the United Methodist Church.
THE WILSON J. AND ESTELLE JONES CULPEPPER SCHOLARSHIP was
established in 1979 by Mrs. Calla Mae Cochran Culpepper. Estelle Jones
Culpepper was an alumna, class of '07.
Financial Planning/ 39
THE C. WILLIAM CURRY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1984
by Mrs. C.W. Curry as a tribute to Mr. Bill Curry, a faithful Trustee and friend
of the College.
THE META DICKINSON DANIEL MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND was
established by her daughter, Virginia Daniel Weir, an alumna of LaCrange
College. Meta Dickinson Daniel was a magna cum laude graduate of La-
Grange College, class of 1893.
THE DEMPSEY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1981 by Ruth
Dempsey, class of 1934, to honor Mr. and Mrs. R.A. Dempsey and R.L.
Dempsey.
THE MARY LEHMANN DODD SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1988
by family and friends in memory Mary Lehmann Dodd, class of '29.
THE GLEN LONG SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1989 by Mr. Glen
Long and will be awarded annually.
THE MAXIE C. ESTES SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1986 by
friends and family of Dr. Estes and the LaGrange College Alumni Association.
Dr. Estes served LaGrange College from 1962 to 1986 as the Chairman of
the Division of Fine Arts and Professor of Speech and Drama.
THE THOMAS HERNDON ESTES MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP was es-
tablished in 1988 by Mrs. Lettie E. Cunningham in memory of her brother to
assist deserving students who need financial assistance to attend LaGrange
College.
THE LAURA TURNER FACKLER SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1980
by Dr. and Mrs. William B. Fackler, Jr., class of 1941, and is awarded to a
senior belonging to Kappa Delta Sorority. Criteria specified are scholarship,
need and character which exemplifies the ideals of Kappa Delta.
THE JOHN DARWIN FAVER MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND was es
tablished in 1983 by the Mattie T. Faver Trust.
THE ELIZABETH STEED FINDLEY SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1 989
by Dr. Carter V. Findley and other family members to honor Elizabeth Steed
Findley, Class of 1930.
THE JOHN AND MARY FRANKLIN GRANT was established in 1975 by
the Alumni Association of LaGrange College and funded by the John and
Mary Franklin Foundation, Inc. The competitive scholarships are awarded
based on academic excellence in high school, SAT scores and recommen-
dations of character and personal qualities.
THE E.J. GRASSMANN TRUST SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
1 988 by the E.J. Grassmann Trust in memory of Mr. Grassmann. Scholarships
will be awarded based on academic promise, good character and demon-
strated financial need.
40 / Financial Planning
THE LINDA GREEN SCHOLARSHIP was established in memory of Linda
Green who died in an automobile accident. This scholarship is awarded to a
Troup High School student with preference to a nursing student who will
attend LaGrange College. Recipients are selected by the high school and
announced at graduation.
THE J.R. AND MARY EVELYN BELLE-ISLE GRIGGS ENDOWMENT FUND
was established by Mr. and Mrs. James R. Griggs, Jr., in 1980 for scholarships
for students majoring in business.
THE ROGER S. GUPTILL SCHOLARSHIP is presented annually in memory
of the late Dr. Roger Guptill, minister, teacher, and Christian gentleman, to
a senior class student majoring in religion and preparing for full-time church
service.
THE MARY QUILLIAN HARRELL SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1974
in memory of Mary Elizabeth Quillian Harrell by Dr. Luther Alonzo Harrell,
her husband, and her surviving children, The Reverend and Mrs. Ralph Moss,
Miss Marie Lilias Harrell and Dr. and Mrs. William Asbury Harrell. Mrs. Harrell
was a graduate of the class of 1 899. Preference is given to children of a South
Georgia minister.
THE MAMIE LARK HENRY DRAMA SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1978 to honor Mamie Lark Henry, wife of Chancellor Waights G. Henry, Jr.,
former President of LaGrange College.
THE EVELYN POWELL HOFFMAN DRAMA SCHOLARSHIP was estab-
lished in 1979 by the family as a memorial. Mrs. Hoffman was a graduate of
the class of 1 930. This scholarship is awarded annually to a freshman through
audition.
THE HOLMES SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1972 to provide
moneys to the general scholarship fund.
THE RALPH AND NITA HOWARD SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1990 by Mr. Ralph W. Howard, Jr. to assist a deserving person who must
have financial assistance in order to attend college.
THE FORREST C. JOHNSON, JR. MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP, estab
lished by his wife, Memory Southerland Johnson, an alumna, is awarded to
a Troup High School graduate who will attend LaGrange College.
THE VIRGINIA SPEEGLE KYLE SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1989
by Mr. Joseph H. Kyle in honor of his wife. Awards will be made to meet the
needs of deserving students who must have financial assistance to attend
LaGrange College.
THE LAGRANGE COLLEGE GENERAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND provides
general scholarships and grants to deserving students based upon need.
Financial Planning/ 41
THE LAGRANGE COLLEGE RELIGION DEPARTMENT SCHOLARSHIPS
were established in 1985 by W. Roland Yarbrough, Jr., for a student dem-
onstrating need who is majoring in religion.
THE MARY HUNTER LINDSEY SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1976,
provided by The Reverend William Oliver Lindsey, Sr. in memory of his wife,
Mary H. Hunter Lindsey, class of 1914. This scholarship is awarded to Meth-
odist students entering their senior year in college and who are preparing for
the full-time ministry.
THE WILLIAM R. AND MABLE LOYD ZACHRY - ERNEST T. AND MARY
LOYD SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in 1988 by nieces Dr. Judy
Greer, Class of 1957, and Alice Loyd Wade.
THE FRANKIE ARNOLD LYLE SCHOLARSHIP was endowed by the will
of Mr. Frankie M. Arnold Lyle, class of 1891. Special consideration is given
to students from Jonesboro High School and Clayton County.
THE FELECIA E. MADDOX MUSIC SCHOLARSHIP was endowed in 1 990
under the will of her husband, George M. Maddox. The fund is intended to
give financial assistance to deserving students of music.
THE MATTOX-ZACHRY SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1 987 in mem-
ory of Kenrick Ware Mattox, Sr., J. Low Zachry and Janie Nail Zachry, and is
awarded to students with academic promise and good character with pref-
erence to the last recipient if she/he maintains a 3.0 cumulative GPA.
THE LOUISE W. MCCOOK MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP FUND was es
tablished in 1985 in memory of Louise W. McCook, wife of Dr. C. Frank
McCook, Professor of Religion.
THE EUDORA AND WALKER MCGARITY SCHOLARSHIP was established
in 1987 by Mrs. Eudora McGarity and daughter Carole McGarity Jacobs, class
of 1958.
THE WILLIAM LUTHER MCMINN, JR. SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1986 by Mr. and Mrs. William L. McMinn, Sr. in memory of their son who
died in an accident on May 15, 1986, while a student at the College. This
scholarship is awarded annually to a student who demonstrates academic
promise and financial need.
THE BETTY YORK MEYERS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1985 by
Mr. and Mrs. Alex B. Meyers, class of 1951, in honor of the United Methodist
Women of Rose Hill United Methodist Church in Columbus, Georgia.
THE C. LAVERN MOBLEY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in mem-
ory of The Reverend C. Lavern Mobley, a Methodist minister of the North
Georgia Conference of the United Methodist Church.
THE POLLY SMITH MOORE SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1988 by
Polly Smith Moore, Class of 1927.
42 / Financial Planning
THE HORTENSE HUGHES MOORE SCHOLARSHIP was established in
1988 by Hortense Hughes Moore, Class of 1927.
THE MR. AND MRS. THOMAS H. NORTHEN SCHOLARSHIP FUND
was established in 1947 to provide moneys to the general scholarship fund.
THE FRANCES WADDELL PAFFORD SCHOLARSHIP is awarded annually
in memory of this alumna, class of 1914, and was funded by Mr. W.E. Pafford.
THE PIKE SCHOLARSHIP was established by Mrs. Ruth Pike Key in mem-
ory of her father and mother, Christian Nathaniel Pike and Adella Hunter
Pike, (1894), on December 29, 1953, and is awarded to Baptist or Methodist
students in the senior year who are majoring in religion or religious education,
or who plan to enter a full-time church vocation. Selection of recipients is
made by the Department of Religion, the Administration concurring.
THE MARGARET ADGER PITTS SCHOLARSHIP was established in honor
of Miss Margaret Pitts to provide scholarships for sons and daughters of or-
dained ministers, $1000 to dependents of Methodist ministers appointed by
the Bishops of both the North and South Georgia Conference and $300 an-
nually to dependents of ministers of other denominations and states.
THE RANDY POLIARD SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1982 by the
LaGrange College Alumni Association in memory of Dr. C. Randy Pollard,
Class of 1960.
THE PEARL WHITE POTTS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1981 by
her daughters Mrs. Amy P. Burgess and Mrs. Edna Potts. Pearl White Potts is
an alumna class of 1894. Recipients will be selected by Mr. James Harlain
Fuller IV and Forrest Clark Johnson III. Preference will be given to descendants
of Mrs. Pearl White Potts.
THE MILTON RATNER SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in Decem-
ber, 1991 by a gift from the Milton M. Ratner Foundation to assist students
with demonstrated financial need.
THE FRANK M. AND JOHN H. RIDLEY SCHOLARSHIP FUND was es-
tablished in 1985 through a gift by brothers, Mr. Frank M. Ridley and Dr.
John H. Ridley.
THE JOHN L. SHIBLEY - ARTHUR M. HICKS SCHOLARSHIP was es-
tablished in 1986 through gifts from family and friends of Dr. Shibley and Dr.
Hicks, both professors of thirty-five years at LaGrange College. Preference is
given to a science major.
THE JAMES H. AND TERRELLIS P. SMITH SCHOLARSHIP was established
in 1976 with preference to descendants of the donor's maternal grandparents.
THE HANK SPINKS SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1988 by Mr. and
Mrs. Henry C. Spinks of LaGrange in memory of their son.
THE G. PHILLIP STEWART SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1987 by
Susan Boleyn, '73, in memory of her husband Phillip Stewart.
Financial Planning/ 43
THE RAYMOND E. SULLIVAN SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
1984 by Mr. Raymond Eugene Sullivan.
THE JESSIE RAY WARNOCK SCHOLARSHIP FUND was established in
1 988 by Mrs. Jessie Ray Warnock, class of 1 927, to assist needy and deserving
students to attend LaGrange College.
THE THELMA C. AND BENJAMIN M. WOODRUFF SCHOLARSHIP was
established in 1 985 by Mr. and Mrs. Benjamin M. Woodruff, (Thelma Chunn,
Class of 1922), and is awarded to students who demonstrate financial need.
ANNUAL SCHOLARSHIP GIFTS
THE JEANNE SELLS ADAMS SCHOLARSHIP is awarded annually in mem-
ory of this alumna, class of '53 and funded by the Walter Clifton Foundation.
THE INGRID BERGMAN SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1983 in the
memory of the Swedish actress by Mr. and Mrs. Mark Clayton Callaway. The
scholarship is for a rising junior or senior theater arts major with serious com-
mitment to the theater and the most promise in the field of drama.
THE MARCUS "MARK" GEWINNER DRAMA SCHOLARSHIP was estab-
lished by the College in 1993 to honor Marcus Gewinner, former professor
of psychology and music. This scholarship is awarded annually to a theater
arts freshman by audition.
THE OAKGROVE COMMUNITY SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1 987
and is funded annually by the Oakgrove Foundation. Preference is given to
students from the Oakgrove Community or to Troup County residents who
have good character, academic promise, demonstrated need and who will
enter the nursing profession or ordained ministry.
THE MATTIE NEWTON TRAYLOR SCHOLARSHIP was established by the
Mattie Traylor Sunday School Class of the First United Methodist Church for
a ministerial student at LaGrange College.
THE LETTIE PATE WHITEHEAD FOUNDATION SCHOLARSHIP AND
GRANTS are awarded annually to deserving women students from the south-
east who demonstrate need.
THE ALMONESE BROWN CLIFTON WILLIAMS SCHOLARSHIP is
awarded annually in honor of this alumna, class of '56 and is funded by the
Walter Clifton Foundation.
ORGANIZATIONAL SCHOLARSHIPS
Some organizations give financial assistance to students directly or upon
recommendation of the Director of Student Financial Planning. Information
may be obtained from the Office of Student Financial Planning at the College.
44 / Financial Planning
THE CHEVRON FRESHMAN SCHOLARSHIP was established in 1985 at
LaCrange College. Students must reside in Georgia and must be a mathe-
matics or science major who demonstrates ability and interest in these areas.
Heavy weighting is given to leadership and significant participation in extra-
curricular activities at the high school level.
THE LAGRANGE MOULDING COMPANY SCHOLARSHIP is funded an-
nually by the LaGrange Moulding Company. Preference is given to Troup
County residents.
THE NATIONAL PURCHASING ASSOCIATION SCHOLARSHIP is funded
annually by the Purchasing Management Association of West Georgia located
in West Georgia.
THE UNITED METHODIST SCHOLARSHIPS Seven $500 annual grants
are made to students by the General Board of Higher Education of the United
Methodist Church and is limited to students in the top 20% of their high
school graduating class.
OUTSIDE ASSISTANCE
The following agencies and foundations are interested in students from the
region and offer assistance on a limited basis to students of character, achieve-
ment and need. The student should apply directly to the agency or founda-
tion.
THE TY COBB EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATION was established by the
late Tyrus R. Cobb to assist capable, deserving students who demonstrate
need and who reside in Georgia. Scholarships are granted for a period of one
academic year but may be renewed for one or more additional years. Schol-
arships are granted to undergraduate students beyond the freshmen year and
to students pursuing graduate degrees in law, medicine, veterinary medicine,
and dentistry. The Ty Cobb Educational Foundation, P.O. Box 725, Forest
Park, Georgia 30051.
THE GEORGIA VOCATIONAL REHABILITATION PROGRAM is funded
by the State of Georgia and is designed to assist handicapped students. Contact
the State of Georgia Division of Vocational Rehabilitation Services in your
district.
THE MILLIKEN SCHOLARSHIP is awarded through the Georgia Founda-
tion for Independent College, Inc. for Region III. Applications are made
through the plant at which the student or their parent works with recipients
selected by the GFIC.
THE JAMES LEON AND MYRTICE MARIE K. PEED SCHOLARSHIP for
students preparing for a career as a minister or missionary and who are resi-
dents of the South Georgia Conference of the United Methodist Church.
Georgia United Methodist Commission on Higher Education and Campus
Ministry, 159 Ralph McGill Blvd, NE, Suite 102, Atlanta, Georgia 30365.
Financial Planning/ 45
PICKETT AND HATCHER EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATION This founda-
tion provides loan assistance to residents of the southeastern states who are
enrolled as full-time undergraduates in a degree curriculum other than law,
medicine, or the ministry. Applicants must have no outstanding educational
loans. Pickett and Hatcher Educational Fund, Inc., P.O. Box 8169, Columbus,
Georgia 31908-8169.
THE GEORGE E. SIMS, JR. NURSING SCHOLARSHIP, funded by the
Fuller E. Callaway Foundation, is administered by the West Georgia Medical
Center and may be available to qualified LaGrange College Nursing Students.
The applications deadline for the Sims Scholarship varies each year but is
generally in early March. Students interested in obtaining scholarship infor-
mation and an application should contact the West Georgia Medical Center
administrative office, (706) 882-1411 or write the hospital at 1514 Vernon
Road, LaGrange, Georgia 30240.
UNITED METHODIST LOAN PROGRAM provides loan assistance to
members of the United Methodist Church based on "need." Brochures and
applications may be obtained from the Office of Student Financial Planning.
COMPETITIVE SCHOLARSHIPS
THE CANDLER SCHOLARSHIP FUND provides scholarship assistance to
students with a predicted grade point average of 3.25 or better. These schol-
arships are renewable.
THE LAGRANGE COLLEGE RESIDENT ASSISTANT SCHOLARSHIP Re-
cipients are selected by application from currently enrolled students who
desire these positions. Applications are taken by the Dean of Student Devel-
opment and the Dormitory Directors. Recipients are selected in the spring for
the next school year.
LOANS
The following loan funds may be available for emergency situations through
the Business Office. For any other student loan the student should contact
the Office of Student Financial Planning for other loan program information.
LOUISE PHARR BAYLEN LOAN FUND Preference given to nursing stu-
dents.
STELLA BRADFIELD LOAN FUND was established by relatives in her mem-
ory.
RUBY CROWE LOAN FUND was established by friends. Preference will
be given to senior women students.
DAVIDSON LOAN FUND was established by Mrs. J.C. Davidson.
THE MARTHA DIXON GLANTON LOAN FUND was established by Mr
Henry D. Glanton in Memory of his mother.
46 / Financial Planning
NADINE CRAWFORD SPENCER LOAN FUND was established by Mr. and
Mrs. C. Mark Whitehead in memory of Mrs. Whitehead's mother.
LAURA H. WITHAM LOAN FUND was established by William S. Witham.
FEDERAL FINANCIAL AID FUNDS
FEDERAL PELL GRANT. This grant is designated for first time undergrad-
uate students working toward a bachelor's degree. The amount of the grant
is determined by the cost of attendance less the family contribution shown
on the Student Aid Report and the student's enrollment status. A full-time
student will receive the maximum Federal Pell Grant award based on appro-
priation for the fiscal year. The maximum Federal Pell Grant award is set at
$2300 for the 1993-94 academic year. A student who enrolls as less than a
full-time student may be eligible to receive a prorated amount based on their
courseload.
FEDERAL SUPPLEMENTAL EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITY GRANT. This
grant is designated for students working on the first undergraduate degree
with exceptional financial need. Preference goes to students who are eligible
for Federal Pell Grant. Students who plan to participate in the LaGrange
College Studies Abroad Program should check with the Office of Student
Financial Planning to determine if they might be eligible to receive Federal
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant funds to assist with paying for
this program.
COLLEGE-WORK STUDY PROGRAM (CWSP). Students who demonstrate
financial need and are otherwise eligible may work part time to earn money
to help pay their education expenses while attending college. Students are
paid the minimum wage and normally are limited to working a maximum of
1 5 hours per week. Jobs are available in the various administrative offices and
various academic divisions.
PERKINS LOAN. These loans are available to qualified students who dem-
onstrate financial need. Repayment of five percent (5%) interest and principal
begins six (6) months after a student graduates or otherwise ceases to be
classified as having half-time student status. This loan program has cancellation
provisions. Contact the Office of Student Financial Planning for additional
information.
FEDERAL STAFFORD LOAN. This program enables all eligible students to
borrow regardless of income. The Stafford Loan program is comprised of two
loans the subsidized Stafford and the unsubsidized Stafford. The subsidized
Stafford eligibility is based on financial need, and interest accruing while the
student is enrolled at least half-time is paid by the government. The interest
rate for a "new borrower", someone who has no outstanding balance on a
Federal Family Education Loan, is a variable rate capped at 9 percent. Eligible
lenders are banks, credit unions, or savings and loans.
Financial Planning/ 47
The unsubsidized Stafford is available to students who do not qualify, in
whole or part, for the subsidized Federal Stafford. The terms of an unsubsi-
dized Stafford are the same as those of the subsidized Staffords with the
exception of interest payments. Unsubsidized Stafford borrowers must pay all
of the interest accruing during the time they are enrolled in-school, and during
grace periods before repayment and authorized deferment. The borrower,
however, has the option to pay interest during those periods by (1) making
monthly or quarterly payments to the lender or (2) the borrower and lender
may agree to add the interest to the principal of the loan (this is capitalization).
Annual maximum awards from the Federal Stafford Loan program is based
upon the borrower's year in school. Freshmen may borrow $2625; sopho-
mores, $3500, juniors and seniors, $5500. The aggregate limit for an under-
graduate degree is $23,000. The grace period for Federal Stafford is six (6)
months.
FEDERAL PARENT LOAN FOR UNDERGRADUATE STUDENT (FPLUS).
This loan program enables parents to borrow on behalf of their undergraduate,
dependent children. Federal PLUS loan borrowers must be proven credit
worthy. A Federal PLUS may not exceed a student's estimated cost of at-
tendance minus any financial assistance the student has been or will be
awarded during the period of enrollment. Loan checks are made co-payable
and mailed directly to the school for certification of the student's eligibility,
then mailed to the parent for endorsement. The interest rate on the Federal
PLUS is variable rate capped at 1 percent.
SUPPLEMENTAL LOANS FOR STUDENTS (SLS). Loan eligibility is not
based on financial need but may be used to substitute for the calculated total
family contribution for self-supporting independent students. A student who
has not yet completed the first and second year of a program of undergraduate
study may borrow $4,000 per academic year subject to proration by enroll-
ment pattern. A student who has completed the first and second years of a
program of study may borrow $5,000 per academic year subject to proration
by enrollment pattern. A graduate or professional student may borrow up to
$10,000 per academic year. The interest rate for the SLS loan program is a
variable rate capped at 11%. Interest accrues on this loan while the student
is in-school and payment of this interest is the responsibility of the borrower.
There are, however, provisions that allow the student the option of paying
the accruing interest or capitalizing that interest. The student should discuss
these options with his/her lender. Other Provisions of this loan are discussed
in the promissory note of the loan application.
STATE STUDENT ASSISTANCE PROGRAMS
To be eligible for assistance from the State of Georgia: (1 ) The student must
be a bona fide Georgia resident, one who has lived in the State of Georgia
for 12 consecutive months prior to enrollment and who lives in the state for
some purpose other than attending a Georgia institution of higher learning.
48 / Financial Planning
(2) Both State Assistance Programs require that a student be classified as a
full-time student (one who enrolls for a minimum of 12 quarter hours). (3)
The student must be a U.S. citizen or classified as a permanent resident alien.
(4) The student must not be receiving a scholarship or grant from or through
any state agency other than Georgia. (5) The student must be enrolled in good
standing or accepted for admission in an eligible non-profit post-secondary
college or school located in Georgia.
GEORGIA STATE TUITION EQUALIZATION GRANT. The GTEG program
provides non-repayable grants to eligible Georgia residents who are either
attending approved private (independent) colleges in Georgia or certain out-
of-state four year public colleges bordering Georgia. The annual award
amount is contingent upon funding by the State Legislature.
GEORGIA STATE STUDENT INCENTIVE GRANT. The SSIG program pro-
vides non-repayable grants to students who demonstrate financial need as
determined by an approved need analysis form.
LAW ENFORCEMENT PERSONNEL DEPENDENTS GRANT. The LEPD
program provides non-repayable grants of up to 2,000 per academic year to
eligible Georgia residents who are dependent children of Georgia law en-
forcement officer, prison guards, or firemen who were permanently disabled
or killed in the line of duty. The LEPD Grant is also payable during the
summer. Additional information may be required to document eligibility.
GSFA SERVICE-CANCELABLE LOAN PROGRAMS
The following loans are administered by the Georgia Student Finance Au-
thority (GSFA) for areas of critical need in Georgia.
State Direct Student Loan (SDLS) is a Federal Stafford Loan with a service
cancellation option for students in an approved critical field program. Each
applicant must meet federal regulations governing the Federal Stafford Loan
Program and GSFA policies concerning residency, program of study, GPA,
etc. There is a grace period, prescribed by federal law, before repayment
must begin. The interest on the loan is paid for the borrower by the federal
government during most periods of enrollment and during the grace period.
Allowable deferments are listed on the Promissory Note. In addition, a student
may apply for a cash repayable Stafford Loan through the SDSL program.
State Sponsored Loan (SSL) is governed by state law and regulation. Each
applicant must first apply for a SDSL and be determined ineligible for the
maximum loan amount due to federal regulations (i.e., high Expected Family
Contribution). Each applicant must meet GSFA policies concerning residence,
program of study or teacher certification, GPA, etc. This loan has a six-month
grace period. However, the interest is not paid for the borrower by the
federal or state government. The interest rate is 8%. Although interest pay-
ments are not required during enrollment, grace period, or deferment periods,
the interest continues to accrue from the day of disbursement of funds. The
Financial Planning/ 49
accrued interest will be added to the principal balance at the time of repay-
ment and will be included in the service cancellation. This loan program does
not include the critical field of Veterinary Medicine, the National Guard loan,
or the cash repayable Stafford Loan.
Applications for these loan programs may be obtained from the Office of
Student Financial Planning.
INSTITUTIONAL GRANT AND WORK PROGRAMS
GRANT IN AID is designated for undergraduate degree seeking students
with preference given to those who register for 15 or more hours per quarter.
Criteria for awarding will be financial need, academic promise and achieve-
ment and talent. Students will be monitored quarterly for GPA, students who
fail to maintain a minimum 2.0 will have subsequent awards canceled until
such time as the 2.0 cumulative GPA has been reached. The student must
contact the Office of Student Financial Planning to request reinstatement of
eligibility. These requests will be considered on a fund availability basis.
WORK AID is a college administered work program whereby students may
reduce the costs of their college expenses through employment on campus.
OFF CAMPUS EMPLOYMENT
Local businesses employ student in part-time jobs. Such employment is usu-
ally arranged by the student and not the College. The office of Career Planning
and Placement maintains current job opportunity information and can advise
students concerning employment opportunities and responsibilities.
STUDENT FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE
FOR GRADUATE STUDENTS
Students accepted for admission to the MBA or M.Ed, program may be
eligible to borrow $8500 per year through the Federal Stafford Loan Program,
provided they meet the following requirements: (1) be a United States citizen
or a permanent resident alien; (2) enrolled or accepted for enrollment as at
least a half-time student; (3) be in good standing and making Satisfactory
Academic Progress; (4) be free of any obligation to repay a defaulted Guar-
anteed Student Loan/Federal Insured Student Loan; and (5) not owe a refund
on a Pell Grant, Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant or State Student
Incentive Grant. For additional information, see the section on "Federal Staf-
ford loan".
The maximum cumulative loans a student may borrow is $65,500, includ-
ing undergraduate loans.
Contact the Office of Student Financial Planning for further information
and an application.
50 / Financial Planning
VETERANS ASSISTANCE
LaGrange College is approved for Veterans Benefits as an institution of
higher learning. Eligible students can receive the appropriate benefits while
enrolled. The laws which apply to these educational benefits are published
in Title 38, United States Code: "Chapter 31 provides benefits for veterans
with service-connected disabilities. Chapter 35 provides benefits for sons,
daughters, spouses, and widowed spouses of veterans who have died in serv-
ice or as a result of a service-connected disability; who have become per-
manently and totally disabled as a result of service-connected disability;
who have died while disabled; or who have been listed as missing in action,
captured, detained, or interned in line of duty for more than 90 days."
Chapter 106 provides benefits for members of the Selected Reserve such as
Army Reserve, Naval Reserve, Air Force Reserve, Marine Corps Reserve, Army
National Guard, Air National Guard, and the Coast Guard Reserve. Chapter
30 and Chapter 32 provide benefits for eligible veterans who contributed to
the educational program.
Disabled veterans should report directly to the Veteran Administration Of-
fice for information and application for benefits. Others may inquire and apply
for benefits in the Registrar's Office with the VA Certifying Officer at the
College.
/51
STUDENT DEVELOPMENT
Student Development Staff is concerned with providing those services
which assist individuals in their personal growth. Their purpose is to provide
assistance which facilitates the development of the total person. At LaCrange
College, the emphasis is upon the intellectual, social, physical and spiritual
development of each student.
"Student Services," the term most frequently used to describe Student
Development Services, involves a wide variety of programs and activities. The
broad range of available services is an outgrowth of complex student needs:
orientation, activities, student government, organizations, health services,
wellness program, parking, discipline, leadership development, personal
counseling, career development and placement, fraternity and sorority socials,
and all residence programming. Student Development staff are committed to
creating the most positive climate possible within which personal growth and
development occur.
Aims of Student Development Services
To facilitate the transition from high school to college.
To develop and sustain through student involvement activities, organiza-
tions and services a campus life encouraging the cultural, intellectual, social,
physical and religious development of all students.
To assist students in discovering life goals and exploring career opportun-
ities.
To provide an opportunity for a student's educational experience to be as
personally meaningful as possible.
To create an environment which stimulates qualities of self-discipline and
personal responsibility.
To provide a suitable context in which the student can explore new ideas,
skills and life styles, thus gaining the insight and experience necessary to make
intelligent choices.
To provide opportunity for the student to develop the understanding and
skills required for responsible participation in a democratic community
through involvement in self-government.
To serve a supervisory role in campus community disciplinary concerns;
to develop, with campus community involvement, and to distribute the nec-
essary rules and regulations for a harmonious and productive college com-
munity.
To mediate, where necessary, conflicts between individuals and campus
community standards.
To provide a comfortable, clean, safe living environment that enhances the
personal growth as well as the academic pursuits of resident students.
52 / Student Development
Residence Programs
RESIDENT CLASSIFICATION
Freshmen, sophomores and juniors taking ten or more hours are required
to live in college housing, so long as appropriate campus housing is available.
Office of Student Development may exempt a student for one of the following
reasons:
1 . The student is 21 years of age or over at the time of registration;
2. The student is married and living with spouse within a radius of fifty
miles;
3. The student is residing exclusively with parents or legal guardian within
a radius of fifty miles; or
4. The student is a veteran with at least two years of active military service.
A senior is defined as a student who has successfully completed at least
135 quarter hours of academic work and who has completed the general
requirements. The Student Development Office will have the final decision
on all requests for exemption.
Students are assigned rooms of their choice in so far as facilities permit.
(Roommates are assigned by mutual preference whenever possible.) The col-
lege reserves the right of final approval of all room and residence hall assign-
ments. Also, the college reserves the right to move a student from one room
or residence hall to another room or residence hall during the year.
ROOM DEPOSIT
A room and tuition deposit of $150 is required of all resident students.
The room deposit ($100) is not a prepayment to be applied to residence hall
charges but will remain on deposit with the college to be refunded, provided
the student's account with the college is cleared, upon one of the following:
(1) change of status from resident student to commuter student, (2) formal
withdrawal, or (3) graduation. The room reservation/damage deposit serves
as a room reservation while the student is not occupying college housing and
is refundable if a student cancels his/her reservation by the following dates:
July 15 for fall quarter, December 15 for winter quarter, March 15 for spring
quarter. It serves as a damage deposit while the student is occupying college
housing and is refundable when the student leaves college housing minus any
unpaid assessments and/or any debt owed to the College. Complete residence
information and regulations can be found in "Housing on the Hill" the resi-
dence hall guidebook available from the Student Development Office.
RESIDENCE GOVERNMENT/ACTIVITIES
Each housing unit has a hall council which functions as a governing body
and also as a coordinating committee to plan activities within the residence
halls such as open houses, movie nights, decorating contests and other special
events.
Student Development/ 53
Student Government Activities
The Student Government Association exists to serve as a medium for stu-
dent expressions, to coordinate campus activities, to promote good citizenship
and to govern within the parameters granted by the President of the College.
The SGA is an important part of student life. Upon acceptance into the col-
lege, a student automatically becomes a member of the association. All stu-
dents are encouraged to become active members, so that the association is a
truly representative body of student thought and opinion, voicing the needs
and concerns of the student body.
The SGA is charged with responsibility of planning and presenting student
programs. They sponsor concerts, dances, movies, ski trips and many other
special events. Student publications are supported by the SGA; these include
the newspaper, yearbook and magazine.
All clubs and organizations are sanctioned by the SGA. These include:
Social Sororities Alpha Omicron Pi
Kappa Delta
Phi Mu
Social Fraternities
Service Clubs
Religious Organizations
Honorary Organizations
Departmental/Special
Interest Groups
Delta Tau Delta
Kappa Sigma
Pi Kappa Phi
Circle K
Hilltoppers
VIP
Baptist Student Union
InterFaith Council
Wesley Fellowship
Alpha Mu Gamma (language)
Alpha Psi Omega (drama)
Delta Mu Delta (business
administration)
Pi Gamma Mu (social science)
Sigma (science-math)
Phi Alpha theta (history)
Omicron Delta Kappa (leadership)
Omicron Delta Epsilon (economics)
Phi Tau Chi (religion)
Psychology Honor Society
Sigma Tau Delta (English)
CRIS Campus Recreation and
Intramural Sports
Student Nurses Association
International Students Club
54 / Student Development
LaGrange Singers
LaGrange College Wind Ensemble
Art Students League
Business & Economics Society
Student Education Association
ABC Association of Black
Collegians
Association of Computer Machinery
German Club Deutschen Klub
Lost Comedy
Student Publications The Quadrangle (yearbook)
The Hilltop Newspaper (paper)
The Scroll (magazine)
Hilltopics, the student handbook, is published by the SGA and contains
guidelines and regulations for successful campus life.
Athletic Program
LaGrange College athletic teams are known as The Panthers. College colors
are red and black. Competitive teams are fielded against teams from other
similar size institutions in women's soccer, volleyball, Softball and tennis and
men's baseball, basketball, soccer and tennis. It is the philosophy of LaGrange
College that the team participants are attending college primarily for a quality
education and no athletic scholarships are offered. The student-athletic re-
ceives praise and recognition from peers, faculty, and administration. The
coaching staff is an assemblage of highly qualified teachers who stress the
educational process of the College.
LaGrange College is committed to a full program of non-scholarship ath-
letics that encourages the student-athlete to reap the benefits of educationally
sound activity that not only encourages but actively promotes a strong aca-
demic regime. Students are given the opportunity to participate fully in their
given sport and to interface with other teams locally, statewide, and regionally.
Not only are their physical skills enhanced but their human relations skills are
broadened and focused by competitive challenges of the body and mind.
The athletic program is affiliated with the National Association of Inter-
collegiate Athletics (NAIA) and is assigned to District 25. This affiliation permits
LaGrange College and its student athletes to receive recognition for their
participation in state, regional and national sporting events.
Campus Recreation and Intramural Sports (CRIS)
The Campus Recreation and Intramural Sports program provides oppor-
tunities for wholesome recreation and competition among members of the
campus community. Teams representing campus organizations and Inde-
pendents compete in organized tournaments and events throughout the year.
Student Development/ 55
Competitive events include flag football, volleyball, basketball (Regulation, 3
on 3, H*0*R*S*E), Domino's Dash, softball, badminton, tennis, water vol-
leyball, inner tube water polo, inner tube basketball and Pickle Ball. Winners
of the campus tournaments in some of these events are eligible to represent
LaGrange College in state or regional tournaments. Special awards are pre-
sented to the men's and women's groups with the highest participation rates
and best record for the entire year. In addition, male and female "Athletes
of the Year" are selected.
Many opportunities are available for recreational use of the facilities in the
LaGrange College Natatorium Complex. The following are available: enjoying
recreational swimming and lap swimming all year round in the indoor pool;
using the aquarius water work-out stations or taking a water aerobics or aqua
exercise class (non-credit); perfecting diving technique on the 1 -meter and 3-
meter diving boards; or simply relaxing and enjoying the atmosphere of the
outdoor leisure pool.
The facilities and equipment of the Physical Education Department also
are available for student recreational use when these are not scheduled for
instructional, athletic, or intramural sports use. The use of outdoor equipment
(canoes, sailboats, backpacks, tents, stoves, lanterns) requires the payment of
a small deposit which is refunded upon the safe return of the equipment. The
Weight Room, Gymnasium, and pools are available for student/faculty/staff
use during posted hours. A valid LaGrange College ID is necessary for ad-
mittance to all facilities.
Religious Life Program
College is a time of exciting intellectual and social growth. Students wrestle
with new ideas, discover new interests, and explore ever broadening horizons.
College can also be a time for real spiritual growth. Set in the transition
between youth and adulthood, college offers students a chance to examine
their faith, to assess what is important to them and to forge a system of values
that will sustain them through their adult years.
Growing out of its history of service and its affiliation in the United Meth-
odist Church, LaGrange is committed to creating an environment that en-
courages spiritual growth and development. As a result, the College offers a
number of opportunities for students and faculty to celebrate life and explore
God's intention for human living. Included in these opportunities are occa-
sions for worship, fellowship, and service. Chapel services are scheduled every
Tuesday and Thursday at 12:00 noon, and there are special worship services
throughout the year. The College employs a full-time chaplain who is available
for counseling and is interested in promoting service and fellowship among
the constituents of the campus community.
56 / Student Development
Programs, Exhibitions and Forum Lectures
A balanced and comprehensive program of lectures, music performances,
dramatic presentations, workshops and other activities contribute to student
enrichment. Wednesdays from 11:00 a.m. until 12:20 p.m. are reserved for
programs, exhibitions and forum lectures.
Traditional Activities
Fall Festival
Ski Weekend
Honors day May Day
Dorm Daze
Greek Week
Black History Week
Quadrangle Dance
Community '94
International Week
Fall weekend featuring concert,
parade and culminating with
crowning of Queen
SGA-sponsored ski trip to Tennessee
or North Carolina
Spring Fling packed with activities,
step-sing and concert
Quarterly events planned exclusively
for residence students
Week of activities centering around
campus Greek life
Week of activities focusing on Black
Heritage
Winter Formal scheduled around
Valentine's Day
Special event that commemorates
the College as a caring/sharing
community
Week set aside to recognize cultural
diversity of the campus community
Student Conduct
LaGrange College, as a church-related college, is committed to an hon-
orable and seemly standard of conduct. As an educational institution the
college is concerned not only with the formal in-class education of its students,
but also with their welfare and their growth into mature men and women
who conduct themselves responsibly as citizens.
Regulations of the college are formulated to meet changing student needs
within the framework of college policy. These regulations become effective
when the student enrolls. Some regulations may not be agreeable to everyone
because they have been formulated to meet the needs of the entire group.
This however, does not lessen the individual's obligation to uphold them.
Student Development/ 57
Regulations do not have as their primary purpose the punishment of the
individual. The regulations are formulated to insure the right of all community
members to have the best possible living and learning conditions.
The college reserves the right to dismiss at any time a student who, in its
judgment, is undesirable and whose continuation in the school is detrimental
to himself or his fellow students.
Furthermore, students are subject to federal, state and local laws as well
as college rules and regulations.
A student is not entitled to greater immunities before the law than those
enjoyed by other citizens generally. Students are subject to such disciplinary
action as the Administration of the College may consider appropriate, includ-
ing possible suspension and expulsion for breach of federal, state or local
laws, or college regulations. This principle extends to conduct off-campus
which is likely to have adverse effect on the college or on the educational
process or which stamps the offender as an unfit associate for the other stu-
dents. A complete description of student conduct policies, rules and regula-
tions can be found in Hilltopics, the student handbook.
Student Health Services
Under the Student Health Program students are provided care by a reg-
istered nurse in the student day clinic. The clinic is open 8:30 a.m. to 2:00
p.m. Monday through Friday and for emergency calls at other times. The
nurse assists the students in securing a physician if needed. The services of
the nurse and the use of the day clinic are available to students only. Charges
for x-rays, prescriptions, hospital charges, and fees of physicians or surgeons
to whom a student is referred are the responsibility of the student. Private
nurses and personal physicians must be paid by the student.
All students must have proof of medical insurance. For those not having
coverage through individual or group plans, LaGrange College makes available
accident and sickness coverage through a private carrier at reasonable rates.
Application forms are available at registration or through the Business Office.
Career Center
The Career Center is located in the Callaway Student Center. It contains
up-to-date career-related materials, occupational information, and a micro-
computer with programs to assist students discover their occupational inter-
ests. A broad range of career exploration is available to the individual student
at no cost. The Center also keeps up-to-date information regarding certifica-
tion and license requirements and qualifying examinations. Other services of
the Career Center include seminars on the employment process, resume prep-
aration, effective interviewing techniques and letter writing skills.
58 / Student Development
A primary focus of the Career Center is to enhance placement potential
by addressing the many-faceted complex realities of searching for a job. There-
fore, beginning in the freshman year, every student will be involved in un-
derstanding the necessity and importance of early preparation for securing
their first position.
Counseling and Testing
An important part of the philosophy of LaCrange College is that each student
should have advice and counseling throughout his/her academic career; there-
fore, counseling is available to LaGrange College students in a variety of areas.
The goal is to assist students in gaining an understanding of themselves so they
are better able to make informed personal, academic and vocational choices.
In addition to individual counseling, group programs are available on topics such
as Study Skills, Test Anxiety Reduction, Career Planning, etc. Small group coun-
seling is available in areas of personal concern such as dealing with parental
divorce, eating disorders, assertiveness training, etc.
The College will assign freshmen to a faculty adviser who will assist with
the design of a program of study as well as any other problems which may
occur. This special program is staffed by identified faculty members who
coordinate the programs of the Freshman experience.
The Office of Student Development also administers the Scholastic Apti-
tude Test (SAT), and the College Level Examination Program, as part of the
College's Advanced Placement Program. The Miller Analogies Test (MAT) is
also available for graduate students. In addition, information about other na-
tional testing programs, e.g. as the Graduate Record Exam (GRE) and the
National Teacher Exam (NTE) is available in this office.
Vehicle Registration
To insure efficient control of traffic and parking on campus and the safety
of ail persons and vehicles, every vehicle must be registered and must have
an affixed current decal. These decals are issued to students, along with a
copy of existing parking regulations. There is a fee. Failure to adhere to pub-
lished policies may result in vehicles being towed.
Student Appeal of Decisions
Recognizing that decisions must be made and that some students may feel
aggrieved by some decisions, LaGrange College provides the following pro-
cedures:
A student must first attempt to resolve an issue with the college staff mem-
ber first rendering a decision. If this does not resolve the issue, a decision
rendered by a college staff member maybe appealed by a student as follows:
Student Development/ 59
I. Student Life:
(a) A disciplinary decision rendered by a duly constituted student
judicial board may be appealed to the Dean of Student Devel-
opment. Disciplinary decisions rendered originally by the Dean of
Student Development may be appealed in writing to the Dean of
the College who shall seek in an informal conference to settle the
grievance to the satisfaction of the two parties involved. If no
resolution can be found, the Dean of the College will deliver the
appeal to the Student Affairs Committee of the faculty for its de-
termination.
(b) Other grievances in the area of student life may be appealed to the
Dean of Student Development. If the grievance involves an original
decision rendered by the Dean of Student Development, the decision
may be appealed as above.
II. Financial Aid. See the Financial Planning Section.
III. Academic Matters. See the Academic Regulations and Procedures Sec-
tion.
/61
Academic Programs and
Degree Requirements
INTRODUCTION
The statement of purpose of LaGrange College describes the mission of the
College. Faculty members and the staff of the College implement academic
and nonacademic programs toward the fulfillment of that mission. Under-
girding all of the academic programs at LaGrange is the fundamental com-
mitment to the liberal arts. Therefore, LaGrange College is first and foremost
a liberal arts college. The College mission includes a commitment to helping
to meet community needs. That commitment prompts the College to offer
certain associate or graduate programs that are coherent with the four-year
baccalaureate programs. The underlying philosophy of liberal learning is found
in all parts of the curriculum of the College but is most obvious in the structure
of the General Education Curriculum, that part of the curriculum that serves
as foundation and complement to the major. All baccalaureate majors share
the same general education curriculum. That general education curriculum
represents just under fifty percent of a student's formal study at the College.
The curriculum is designed to provide the components of a liberal arts
education that historically have proved to be of lasting value. Those compo-
nents include skills such as strategies for college success, writing, computation,
speaking, problem-solving, computer utilization, and analytical thinking. Ad-
ditionally, there are knowledge components including history, social studies,
science, literature, religious heritage, modern foreign languages, and health.
These skills and knowledge areas, while being taught and learned in specific
courses, are integrated into the total college experience, and the desired result
is that students will be better able to function within social institutions, to use
science and technology, and to use and understand the role of the arts in
culture, They, likewise, will be better able to communicate, to solve problems,
and to analyze and clarify their own value system.
THE MAJORS
A major is defined as a primary program of study in which the student
completes a designated number and sequence of courses within a specific
discipline, department or subject area. A major may or may not offer con-
centrations for focused coursework within the major.
A student may choose to pursue one of three baccalaureate degrees: the
bachelor of arts, the bachelor of science, and the bachelor of business admin-
istration. Most students pursue one of these baccalaureate degrees. In addition
to the baccalaureate degree programs, students may earn an associate of arts
or a master degree, a post-baccalaureate degree.
62 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements
The associate degree and the baccalaureate degree each contain a sub-
stantial general education component and extensive specified course work in
the discipline in which the student has chosen a major. The degrees offered
and the majors available for the degrees are given.
Bachelor of Arts
Art and Design
Art Education
Biology
Business Administration
Chemistry
Christian Education
Computer Science
Economics
Education
Early Childhood
Middle Childhood
Secondary (Economics, English, Chemistry, Biology, History, Mathematics)
English
History
Mathematics
Music (fall 1994)
Political Science
Psychology
Religion
Social Work
Theatre Arts
Bachelor of Science
Chemistry
Computer Science
Mathematics
Bachelor of Business Administration
Business Administration with a concentration in one of the following areas:
Accounting
Business Economics
General Business Management
International Business
In addition to these four-year baccalaureate degrees, LaCrange College
offers the Master of Education Degree, the Master of Business Administration
Degree, and the Associate of Arts Degree. The degrees and the concentration
within the degree are given:
Academic Programs and Degree Requirements/ 63
Master of Education (See Graduate Bulletin)
Early Childhood Education
Middle Childhood Education
Master of Business Administration (See Graduate Bulletin)
General Business with emphasis on the management function
Associate of Arts Degree
Business Administration
Criminal Justice
Liberal Studies
Nursing
All majors offered are described in detail in the Departments and Courses
section.
Major Requirements, Time Restrictions
Coursework requirements in major programs necessarily change in re-
sponse to evolving curriculum concerns and changing student needs. Stu-
dents' major requirements are governed by the Bulletin in force at the time
of the declaration of major. The declaration of major is initiated in the regis-
trar's office.
At the discretion of the department chairman, students may be required
to demonstrate proficiency and/or currency in the subject matter if the major
coursework is older than five (5) academic years. Normally credit hours earned
in the major may not be applied to the completion of the major if the hours
earned are older than eight years dated from the student's initial matriculation.
Students who have been out of school longer than two years must again
declare their majors.
Independent Study in the Major
In certain majors independent study courses are offered. These courses are
limited to upperclass major and minor students who have completed at least
two-thirds of their particular major or minor program, and who wish to pursue
a special problem or course of reading beyond that taken up in any formal
course and lying within the capabilities of the library and laboratories. In order
to be eligible for independent study the student must have at least a 3.0
average in major courses. Total credit which can be earned through inde-
pendent study normally will not be more than 10 quarter hours. Written
permission to enroll in such a course must be obtained from the instructor,
the head of the department concerned, and the Vice President and Dean of
the College. These courses carry the numbers 495 and 496. A descriptive
syllabus including the method of evaluation must be submitted with the pe-
tition.
64 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements
Senior Honors in the Major
Seniors with a cumulative quality point average of 3.5 or above may apply
for participation in the Honors Program which is available in certain depart-
ments. This program carries the course number 499, with five quarter hours
credit in each participating department, with the designation "Honors
Course." Applications must be submitted in writing to the Vice President and
Dean of the College.
Assessment in the Major
The faculty members who are responsible for instruction in the major pro-
grams have identified specific objectives for a major in that discipline. There
is as assessment, devised by the faculty in the discipline, that determines the
extent to which the objectives have been met by the student. That assessment
is a requirement for students who graduated in June 1990, or who will grad-
uate thereafter. The assessment styles are varied. Students should carefully
explore with their adviser in their intended major the nature of the assessment.
A satisfactory assessment in the major is a requirement for the degree. The
chairman of the department offering the major must certify satisfactory com-
pletion of the assessment component.
Students who fail to complete satisfactorily the assessment in the major
and exhaust reassessment opportunities at the departmental level may appeal
the decision of the department as described in the Academic Procedures and
Regulations section.
Advice and Counseling in the Major
All students are assigned an academic adviser. Prior to the declaration of
a major a student is advised by his or her Freshman Seminar (COL 101)
instructor. Subsequent to declaring a major, the students and the department
chairman work together in planning a program. The ultimate responsibility
for selecting the proper courses in order to complete the desired degree
is the responsibility of the student.
Academic Programs and Degree Requirements/ 65
GENERAL EDUCATION CURRICULUM
The goals and objectives for general education have been described. The
curriculum is designed to be completed within three academic years with
coursework from the major being merged with the general education during
the sophomore and junior years.
Ninety-five quarter hours in the general education curriculum are taken in
two parts, one which is essentially nonelective (the common core), and the
second which allows the student latitude in the selection of course work.
Common Core:
40 hours
Course
Freshman Seminar
English, Grammar and Composition 1
ENG 101, 102, 103
Credit Year Taken
2 hours Freshman Year
9 hours Freshman year
History (select one sequence)
World Civilization (HIS 101, 102)
10 hours
Freshman year
or
United States History (HIS 111,112)
Mathematics, MAT 110, 111, or 122 1
(by placement)
5 hours
Freshman year
Computer Science (CSC 1 63)
2 hours
Freshman year
Religion (REL 101)
5 hours
as best scheduled
Speech (SPC 105)
3 hours
as best scheduled
Physical Education Activities
Common Core Total
4 hours
40 hours
as best scheduled
Electives:
55 hours
1 . Science and Mathematics
15 hours
as best scheduled
Two science courses in sequence
(10)
BIO 101, 102
CHM 101, 102
GSC 101, 102
PHY 101, 102; 121, 122
An additional science course from
the list above, a mathematics
course from the core beyond
that taken for the core require-
ment, or MAT 123.
(5)
66 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements
Humanities and Fine Arts
25 hours
as best scheduled
Literature, English
(10)
ENG 104, 105, 106, 107
Fine Arts
(5)
MUS 112, 114; Art 109, 110;
THA 101, 102
Modern Foreign Language 1
(10)
FRN 101, 102 or 103, 121
GER101, 102 or 103, 121
SPN 101, 102 or 103, 121
LAN 101, 102 or 103, 121 2
Social and Behavioral Science
15
as best scheduled
ECO 101; PSC101; PSY 149
SOC 146, 148
Elective Total
55 hours
Total General Education
95 hours
1 Please read carefully the note following about placement.
Occasionally, if taught under the LAN label, other languages (Japanese, Hebrew, etc.) may also count
as general education.
Placement
Appropriate placement in certain courses is essential.
Students entering LaGrange College bringing with them two (2) years of
high school foreign language will be placed in an intermediate level course
of that language; or if the student chooses he or she may start the study of
another language at the beginning level. Students for whom English is not the
native language may consult with the chairman of the Division of Humanities
and Fine Arts. By individual determination, that student may have the lan-
guage requirement waived. The waiving of the language requirement does
not diminish the need to complete a total of 95 quarter hours in general
education.
During the first few days on campus all students will undergo diagnostic
assessment. These inventories are necessary for (1) planning for majors and
careers, (2) providing the comparison levels for subsequent general education
assessment, and (3) determining current skills levels in mathematics and Eng-
lish. Mathematics placement is based on skills assessment. Some students who
are not predicted to be successful in any one of these general education
mathematics courses (110, 1 1 1 , or 1 22) are required to enroll in Mathematics
100. This is a pre-general education mathematics course, and credit in this
course does not count toward the fulfillment of the 95 quarter hours of general
education.
English placement is based on the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) data,
where available. The Test of Standard Written English (TSWE) is a sub-test of
Academic Programs and Degree Requirements/ 67
the SAT. For students who do not have recent SAT scores, the TSWE is given
early in the orientation period. Students who score 37 or below are required
to enroll in English 100, a pre-general education course in grammar and
composition. Students who score between 38 and 45 are placed in either
ENG 100 or ENG 101 based on a consideration of a written sample of work
submitted by the student during the specified diagnostic assessment time
schedule for English. Like Mathematics 100, English 100 does not count to-
ward the fulfillment of any of the 95 hours in general education.
General Education, Time Restrictions
There is no time limit on the credit or validity of general education course-
work. It should be noted, however, that students who have not been enrolled
at LaGrange College for four years, or who transferred from LaGrange College
and subsequently return, enter the college under the Bulletin in force at the
time of re-entry.
Credit-by-Examination and Exemption
Students may be eligible for credit and/or exemption in certain areas
through the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) and other recognized
testing procedures. Advanced placement credit is accepted for those students
who present evidence from the high school that advance placement programs
have been completed and who present scores of 4 or 5 on the advanced
placement test of the Collegm Education Examination Board administered by
Educational Testing Service. Credit by examination (AP or CLEP) may reduce
the 95 hour general education component by the credit hours earned by this
process. If no credit is earned, but exemption is granted, then 95 quarter
hours of general education are to be completed.
Freshman Seminar, College 101, "Gateway to Success" (two hours
credit)
This is an academic course in which experienced LaGrange faculty mem-
bers and students selected for their academic achievement, their demonstra-
tion of leadership and their admirable personal standards guide new students
toward success. The faculty members and the very important peers (VIP's)
meet their small group of newcomers during the early stages of orientation
and begin the process of familiarization with the campus, with academic
procedures and processes, and with each other. The formation of the informal
support group, the beginning of the systematic process of selecting possible
careers and academic majors, the reinforcement of writing as effective com-
munication and academic advising are a part of COL 1 01 . The curriculum of
this course may vary from time to time and may be thematic. The goals of
the course are not variable and are to help the student feel as comfortable
as possible in this new environment, to help him or her to be as successful
as possible during this first year and to help lay the foundation for a successful
four-year college experience.
68 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements
Assessment of General Education
When a student has 140 hours credit, (s)he should take American College
Testing Program's College Outcome Measures Program (COMP). This inven-
tory will be used to determine the extent to which students have achieved
the objectives of the general education curriculum. Meaningful participation
in this testing program and achievement of a mean gain score of six (6) are
requirements for graduation with a baccalaureate degree.
Nontypical Students and the General Education Requirements
Nontypical students are those who enter college for the first time and who
meet any two of the three following criteria:
(1 ) aged twenty-five or greater
(2) employed full-time or at least three-fourths time
(3) living off campus
These students may have experiences and needs differing from traditional
students which may allow them to develop a curriculum plan of their own to
meet the general education requirements.
The common core portion (40 quarter hours) of the general education
requirements is the same for these students as it is for traditional students.
However, as part of the College 1 01 "Gateway to Success" class requirements
the nontypical student may develop a personal proposal for fulfilling the re-
maining 55 quarter hours portion of the general education requirements. This
proposal is normally prepared utilizing the guidelines specified below and is
reviewed and accepted by the Evening Studies Director. At that point the
nontypical student is classified as a nontraditional student. Any proposal de-
viating from the guidelines must be approved by the curriculum committee.
Once the contract is developed it may be changed only one time. Students
may appeal the action of the curriculum committee to the Academic Advisory
Council.
As a general rule the nontraditional general requirement option is for in-
coming freshmen students. To be eligible the freshmen student must must:
. (1) Meet the nontypical criteria upon matriculation (see 1-3 in opening
paragraph of this section).
(2) Complete COL 101.
(3) Initiate the contract process before beginning their third quarter in
residence.
(4) Complete (gain approval for) the contract within the first 45 hours
earned.
The nontraditional general education requirement option also is available
for new transfer students who meet the nontypical criteria and who have
completed no more than 20 hours of general education beyond the common
core upon matriculation at LaGrange College. For this proposal to be consid-
ered, it must be initiated during the first quarter in residence and finalized
Academic Programs and Degree Requirements/ 69
(approved) before the new, nontypical transfer student earns 20 hours at
LaGrange College
Common Core 40 hours
Contractual Elective 55 hours (at least 5 hours from each area)
I. Fine Arts
MUS 112, 114; ART 109, 110; THA 101, 102
II. Literature
ENG 104, 105, 106, 107
III. Modern Foreign Language (level by placement)
FRN 101, 102 or 103, 121
GER101, 102 or 103, 121
SPN 101, 102, 121, or 110
LAN 101, 102; 110; 103, 121
IV. Science and Mathematics
BIO 101, 102; CHM 101 102; GSC 101, 102
PHY 101, 102; 121, 122
MTH 111 or 122
V. General Studies (no more than 25 hours)
EDU 199, PSC 101, PSY 149, REL 110, SOC
153, SOC146
SOC 147, ECO 101, BUA151
CSC 151, ART 171, ART 180, PHL 149
Occasionally other languages (Japanese, Hebrew, etc.) may be taught. Those languages, if taught under
the IAN category, also satisfy the general education requirement.
Total General Education 95 hours
Placement criteria and assessment procedures are the same for both tra-
ditional and nontraditional students.
General Education for the Two-year Associate Degree
The requirements for a liberal studies associate degree is the completion
of the 95 quarter hours general education curriculum. No "major" courses
are a part of this associate degree.
The general education curriculum for the associate degrees in business
administration, criminal justice, and nursing are given.
70 / Academic Programs and Degree Requirements
Business Administration
ire 40 Hours
Elective 25 Hours
COL 101
2
ECO 101
ENG 101, 102, 103
9
MTH (beyond that taken
in the core)
HIS 101, 102 or 111, 112
10
Lab Science
CSC 163
2
ENG 104 or 105 or 106 or 107
SPC105
3
Foreign Language
MTH 110, 111, or 122
(by placement)
5
REL101
5
PED
4
Total 65
Criminal Justice
Core
36 Hours
COL 101
2
ENG 101, 102, 103
9
SPC105
3
MTH 110, 111, 122
(by placement)
5 Hours
CSC 163
2
PSC101
5
SOC146
5
PSY149
5
Elective I
5 Hours
HIS 111 or 112
Elective II 5
REL 101 or 110 or
PHL 149
Elective III 5 Hours
GSC 101, CHM 101,
BIO 101 or PHY 101
Total
51
Nursing
re
28 Hours
COL 101
2
ENG 101, 102, 103
9
MTH 110, 111, 122
(by placement)
CSC 163
2
SOC146, PSY149
10
Total
28
Academic Programs and Degree Requirements/ 71
Placement and assessment procedures are the same as for baccalaureate
degrees, except COMP will be given during the last quarter in residence.
The courses in the major may be found in the Departments and Courses
section of the Bulletin.
Minors
Academic minors may be earned in most departments. A minor must
include at least 30 hours, 1 5 of which must be in 300-level or above courses.
Specific courses are not designated, but they must be approved by the chair-
man in the minor department.
Special Institutes/Continuing Education
LaGrange College coordinates and initiates special institutes and continuing
education activities. These activities include work with area and state
churches, industries, health care facilities and businesses. For certain of these
activities the College gives continuing education units (C.E.U.).
/73
Academic Regulations and
Procedures
Orientation and Counseling
All new students are introduced to LaGrange College through an orienta-
tion program which takes place at the beginning of each quarter. The orien-
tation program is designed to acquaint the new students with various phases
of the life of the College including traditions, procedures, and regulations. It
is believed that all students will profit from a proper introduction to the
opportunities and responsibilities of college life.
Freshman Seminar (COL 101) deals with the elements of learning and
decision making not covered in the traditional curricular structure that are
essential to the student's educational process. These include selecting courses,
study skills, making long-term educational plans, placing course work in a
broader context of student development, dealing with personal difficulties,
and adjusting to the inadequacies in pre-college preparation. To help students
at LaGrange College face these issues in an organized way, Freshman Seminar
is taught. This two-hour course provides an opportunity for freshmen to work
with faculty and other students in the consideration of issues designed to assist
them in making decisions and in dealing with the many interrelated problems
that have a bearing on their academic career.
Registration
All students must register on the dates specified. Failure to register on the
proper dates may subject the student to a $20 late-registration fee. All reg-
istration procedures for all quarters are under the direction of the Vice Pres-
ident and Dean of the College. Students have not completed registration until
they have cleared the Registrar, Dean of Student Development and the Busi-
ness Office. Students enrolled for twelve or more hours must obtain a campus
post office box. Communications to the student will be through campus mail.
Each student is assigned to a faculty adviser, who assists the student in
planning an academic program. However, the ultimate responsibility for meet-
ing all requirements rests with the individual student
A student interested in a particular major should inform his general adviser
in order that special prerequisite courses for the major may be scheduled. A
major may be formally declared anytime after the student has earned 22
hours of credit. The student must declare his major in writing to the Registrar
by the time he has earned 75 quarter hours of credit The student will then
74 / Academic Regulations and Procedures
be assigned to an adviser in the department in which he will major. A student
planning to pursue a program in Teacher Education must take application in
writing to the head of the Department of Education at least by the time he
declares his major.
A student's major program requirements are those described in the college
Bulletin at the time of declaration of the major.
Withdrawal
To withdraw from any course a student must confer with his instructor, his
adviser, and the Vice President and Dean of the College. Failure of a student
to withdraw officially through the office of the Dean of the College normally
will result in the assignment of a WF. A student who wishes to withdraw from
the College must confer with the Dean of the College and the Dean of Student
Development. Withdrawals are not permitted the last week of class.
Academic Standing Probation Regulations
Students are placed on academic probation when the quality of work is
such that progress toward graduation is in jeopardy. The purpose of probation
is to warn. It is not a penalty. Students on probation will be notified, and the
regulations governing probation will be called to their attention.
Freshmen (fewer that 45 hours) must maintain a cumulative grade point
average (GPA) of at least 1.65 to avoid being placed on probation. Sopho-
mores (45-89 hours), a 1.75 GPA; Juniors (90-134 hours), a 1.85 GPA; and
Seniors (135 or more hours), a 2.00 GPA. In most cases, students have three
quarters to remove their probationary status. Failure to do so makes these
students subject to suspension.
Students are also subject to suspension for failure to earn at least five
quarter hours of academic credit in any quarter, or for other valid academic
reasons (such as violating cheating and plagiarism standards). In the case of
part-time students, the extent of application of these regulations will be at the
discretion of the Vice President and Dean of the College. Normally, all ap-
plications of the regulations will be based upon a full academic load.
the grade report sent to the student provides information on standing.
"Probation one" means that the student's next term will be the first term on
probation, etc. "Dean's Decision" means that the student's academic records
have been given to the Vice President and Dean of the College for action.
Class Attendance Regulations
A student is expected to attend all classes, including labs, for all courses
for which he is registered. The student is solely responsible for accounting to
his instructor for any absence. An instructor may recommend that the Vice
Academic Regulations and Procedures/ 75
President and Dean of the College drop from class with a grade of W or WF
any student whose absences are interfering with satisfactory performance in
the course.
Course Repetition
A student is prohibited from repeating a course in which he has made a
"C" or better (while enrolled at LaGrange College or any other institution)
without the approval of the Vice President and Dean of the College and the
Academic Advisory Council. A student may not remove an unsatisfactory
grade earned at LaGrange College by repeating the course at another insti-
tution.
Acceleration
Students desiring to accelerate their college program may complete re-
quirements in less than four academic years. This may be accomplished by
attending summer schools and/or taking an academic overload. Permission to
take an overload in any quarter is granted only to those students who have
earned at least a cumulative average of B (3.0), except that a student may
take an overload during one quarter of his senior year without respect to
grade-point average.
Students may be eligible for credit and/or exemption in certain areas
through the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) and other recognized
testing procedures. Advanced placement credit is accepted for those students
who present evidence from the high school that advance placement programs
have been completed and who present scores of 4 or 5 on the advanced
placement test of the College Entrance Examination Board administered by
Educational Testing Service.
Academic Honors
Upon graduation, students who have been in residence at LaGrange Col-
lege for at least their last 90 hours and
1. have attained a quality point average of 3.50 to 3.74 may be granted
the bachelor degree cum laude or
2. have attained a quality point average of 3.75 to 3.89 may be granted
the bachelor degree magna cum laude or
3. have attained a quality point average of 3.90 to 4.0 may be granted
the bachelor degree summa cum laude.
At the end of each academic quarter, students who have maintained a
3.60 quality point average on a minimum of 15 quarter hours of work will
be placed on the Dean's list.
Academic honors at graduation are awarded only to students completing
the four-year program (effective with 1985 graduates).
76 / Academic Regulations and Procedures
International Students
Students who are on a student visa in the United States are subject to
special regulations. As the institution which issues documents certifying stu-
dent status, LaGrange College is subject to regulations or guidelines. Guide-
lines change, students should contact the Vice President and Dean of the
College for interpretation of such changes. The current interpretation is that
students with student visas must be enrolled for a full academic load (at least
12 quarter hours) at all times.
English proficiency is fundamental to a successful academic course at
LaGrange College. Therefore, in addition to the minimum TOEFL score re-
quired for admission, the College requires all students for whom English is a
second language to enroll in and satisfactorily complete a two-quarter se-
quence, ENG 010, 011. Further, if it is apparent that a student's English
continues to jeopardize a successful academic career, the Vice President and
Dean of the College may require that a student attend a special, intensive
English language course. If such a requirement is placed on a student, failure
to attend the English language course can result in withdrawal of the student
visa.
International students must enroll in an English course each quarter
they are in school until they satisfactorily complete their English studies.
Credit through United States Armed Forces
Institute and Service Schools
Courses taken through The United States Armed Forces Institute and other
recognized military educational programs are accepted in accordance with
the policy governing transfer work when presented on official transcripts from
accredited institutions. Fifteen quarter hours of elective credit will be allowed
for military service credit, including USAFI correspondence courses and mil-
itary service school courses as recommended by the American Council on
Education. One activity course in physical education, up to a maximum of
four, will be waived for each two months served in the Armed Forces; a
corresponding reduction will be made in the total number of hours required
for the degree.
Academic Regulations and Procedures/ 77
Grades and Credits
The definitions of grades given at LaGrange College are as follows:
*A superior
*B above average
*C average
*D below average
F failing
I incomplete. This grade is assigned in case a student is doing
satisfactory work but for some reason beyond the student's control
has been unable to complete the work during that quarter. This
deferment must be given written approval in advance by the
instructor and the Vice President and Dean of the College.
NC no credit or non-credit
W withdrawn. During the first three weeks a student may withdraw
from a class with an "automatic" "W." After this trial period the
student may withdraw, but the grade assigned, "W" or "WF," will
be at the discretion of the professor.
WF withdrawn failing. The grade of WF is included in computing the
grade-point average.
AW audit withdrawn
AU audit complete
NR grade not reported by instructor at the time the report issued.
A student may register for a course on a non-credit basis, for which he
pays full tuition. To have a grade of NC recorded, he must fulfill all course
requirements.
A student may audit a course by paying the audit fee. All requests for audit
courses must be approved in writing by the instructor and Vice President and
Dean of the College. Only lecture courses may be audited. No new freshman
student may audit any course during the first quarter of residence at LaGrange
College.
An / is a temporary grade, assigned by an instructor within the last three
weeks of the term to students who are doing satisfactory work and who cannot
complete the course due to circumstances beyond their control. Shou-ld con-
ditions prohibiting completion of a course arise within the first eight weeks,
students withdraw.
An / is removed by the date indicated in the Academic Calendar. Failure
to remove an / by the date set initiates the following action: The registrar will
Pluses and minuses indicate performance just above or below letter grade level. Grade point averages
are computed using pluses and minuses.
78 / Academic Regulations and Procedures
write a letter to the student using the address on file. The letter indicates that
the student has two weeks to respond. Otherwise the "\" grade will be con-
verted to an "F". A grade other than /, once submitted, may not be changed
by an instructor except with the formal approval of the Academic Advisory
Council, within the next quarter.
Grades are assigned and recorded for each course at the end of each
quarter. Formal reports of grades are also issued at the same time. Transcripts
are withheld for any student who is under financial obligation to the College.
Requirements for Bachelor Degrees A Summary
LaGrange College offers the Bachelor of Arts degree, the Bachelor of Sci-
ence degree, and the Bachelor of Business Administration degree. To obtain
a second bachelor's degree, at least 60 additional quarter hours must be
earned beyond the first degree, in a minimum of three quarters. Baccalaureate
degrees require a minimum of 195 quarter hours of credit including required
coursework in general education and the major. There is often an opportunity
to select course work electives.
The minimum work required for graduation is 195 quarter hours and a
2.0 quality-point average overall, as well as in all course work taken at La-
Grange College. To be eligible for the degree, a student must meet all re-
quirements for the degree (general education, major program, all necessary
assessments, 195 quarter hours and and 2.0 cumulative grade point average)
and make application for the degree before the beginning of his/her final
quarter. A student who does not earn a degree in sixteen full quarters or the
equivalent may be denied further registration.
A minimum of 16 quarter hours meets the academic load requirement for
a full-time student. The maximum full load is 19 quarter hours; anything
beyond is considered an overload. No student is permitted to enroll for more
than 22 hours in any one quarter. Request to take an overload must be
granted in the office of the Vice President and Dean of the College.
Quality points are earned as follows: A, 4; B, 3; C, 2; D, 1; F, 0. Pluses
and minuses respectively add and subtract three tenths of a point to the quality
point. (Example a B- is 2.7 quality points.) The quality-point average is com-
puted by multiplying the grade point by the course credit, summing, and then
dividing the total quality points earned by the total hours attempted. If a
student has received credit for a course and repeats that course, he receives
no additional credit toward the degree. In computing the student's average,
hours attempted and quality points are counted on all such attempts.
Not more than 100 quarter hours of credit earned at a junior college are
counted toward the degree. No credit is granted toward the degree for course
work taken at a junior college after a student has attained junior standing. A
Academic Regulations and Procedures/ 79
transfer student is not given credit toward graduation for any Ds earned else-
where. Transient work for grade of C or better is acceptable. Academic av-
erages are computed on work done only at LaCrange College.
There are two ways by which a student must meet residency requirements
for graduation:
(1) The student must be in residence the last four quarters or 60 hours
or
(2) 75 Credit hours of the last 90 credit hours must be earned at LaCrange
College. With prior approval of the advisor and the Vice President and
Dean of the College up to 15 hours of transient study may be earned
at another four-year accredited institution. Transient credit is only for
courses in which the grade is C or better.
Grades earned for transient work are not included in the cumulative grade
average. Normally, after receiving an unsatisfactory grade in a course at
LaCrange College, a student will not be given credit for repeating that course
at another institution. Credit totaling 10 hours or more earned in this way
during the last 90 hours or final 6 quarters precludes that student's being
granted credit for any course work taken by extension or by correspondence
during the period.
Any regularly enrolled LaGrange College student who desires to take course
work for credit by extension or by correspondence must obtain prior approval
in writing from his academic adviser and from the Vice President and Dean
of the College. Such extension or correspondence credit may in no case
exceed 10 hours (grades of C or better); however, not more than 5 hours
earned in this manner may be applied toward the fulfillment of the General
Requirements of LaGrange College. Any course or courses so taken must be
completed and all grades recorded before the end of the student's final
quarter, in order to be graduated that quarter.
, A student is classified as a freshman if he has earned fewer than 45 hours
of credit. A student is classified as a sophomore if he has earned 45-89 of
credit. To be classes as a junior, a student must have earned 90 hours of
credit. A student is classified as a senior upon having earned 135 hours of
credit. A student should be alert to the fact that 195 hours are required for
graduation. Attaining these minimum progression requirements may not be
sufficient to insure graduation within the three quarters of the senior year.
No grade below C in any course above 100-level may be applied toward
a major.
Requirements for the Associate of Arts Degree
As previously described, the College offers programs of study leading to
the Associate of Arts degree. Students pursuing an associate degree must
complete the general education component required for that degree, the
prescribed coursework in the discipline and a minimum of 95 quarter hours.
80 / Academic Regulations and Procedures
The last 30 quarter hours must be done in residence. A 2.00 grade point
average is necessary.
Transcripts
Students are entitled to transcripts of their record free of charge. No tran-
scripts will be used for any student under financial obligation to the College.
Transcript requests must be made in writing to the Registrar well in advance
of the time the transcript is needed. Transcripts will be issued promptly;
however, at the beginning and end of quarters some delay may be unavoid-
able.
Student Review of Academic Decisions
Decisions pertaining to the academic program which are originally ren-
dered by a faculty member may be appealed, in writing, to the Vice President
and Dean of the College who shall seek in an informal conference to settle
the grievance to the satisfaction of the two parties involved. If no resolution
can be found, the Dean will deliver the appeal to the Review Subcommittee
of the Academic Standards Committee for its determination.
Decisions pertaining to the academic program originally rendered by the
Vice President and Dean of the College may be appealed to the Review
Subcommittee of the Academic Standards Committee.
Student Appeal of Academic Policy
Students may petition for exception to published academic policy. The
Academic Advisory Council reviews the petition.
Graduation Requirements
A student who enters LaGrange College under a given Bulletin generally
will be graduated under the general education, hours requirement and grade
point average requirements of that Bulletin. Major requirements are those in
force at the time a student formally declares a major. If a student suspends
his/her study and re-enters more than four years later, he will graduate under
the requirements of the Bulletin in effect at the time of re-entry.
Students in their last year of college work must have an audit of their course
credits and planned courses examined prior to registration for their final
quarter in residence. This is called a "graduation petition." The major adviser
and the Office of the Vice President and Dean of the College assist the student
in completing this petition.
Academic Regulations and Procedures/ 81
Students at LaGrange College will participate in the evaluation of the extent
to which institutional education goals are being achieved. This evaluation will
be in both the general education area and the major. Students who graduated
in June 1990 were the first class to participate in these comprehensive eval-
uations. Consult the specific majors for the details.
Graduation Rate
Graduation rates are being collected for all students who enter LaGrange
College. For students who entered Fall 1988, 46.2% of new freshmen and
49.1 of new students (freshmen and transfers) persisted to graduation at
LaGrange College. The analysis of those who did not persist to graduation at
LaGrange College is incomplete; it includes, however, students who trans-
ferred to complete programs that were part of an overall academic plan (dual
degree engineering, certain allied health fields and similar areas) as well as
students who dropped out for academic, financial or personal reasons.
Students who compare graduation rates should be certain that they are
comparing figures that represent identical databases.
Endowed Lectureship
The Waights G. Henry, Jr. Endowed Lectureship was established by a
gift from the Neighbors Fund, Inc. in memory of Dr. Henry, president and
chancellor of LaGrange College over a period of 42 years. Income from the
endowment is to be used annually in funding the Waights G. Henry lectures
for the benefit of our students and as approved by the trustees of the College.
The Arthur H. Thompson Lectureship brings to the campus each year
noted scholars to address the faculty and student body on the interrelationship
of a field knowledge and the Christian religion. The endowment was estab-
lished by Mrs. Mary Will Thompson, alumna, in memory of her husband,
who was at one time chairman of the Board of Trustees of the College. He
expressed his philosophy in the statement: "The greatest thing in life is the
simple faith of an honest man."
Awards and Recognitions
The Nancy Alford Award is awarded each year to the sorority accumulating
the greatest number of points in the areas of scholarship, leadership, sports-
manship, and community service.
The Irene E. Arnett Drama Award is presented annually to the member
of the senior class who shows that greatest potential for contribution to the
field of theatre, devotion to the tasks in the theatre, and dedication to the
82 / Academic Regulations and Procedures
principles of good theatre to amuse the heart and lift the spirit to a better
understanding of man and his struggle in this world and towards his God.
The Needham Avery Art Award is a purchase award granted annually in
visual arts, provided by Dr. and Mrs. R.M. Avery in memory of their son.
The E.A. Bailey Award is awarded each year to the fraternity accumulating
the greatest number of points in the areas of scholarship, leadership, sports-
manship, and community service.
The Josephine A. Case Scholarship is for a junior for excellence in art
and promise of achievement in that field. This award carries a stipened and
is associated with Josephine A Case Collection of American Indian Art which
she and her husband, Leland D. Case, of Tucson have donated to LaCrange
College. Both hold honorary doctorates from this school.
The Austin P. Cook Award is presented annually by the Student Govern-
ment Association to the organization that made the most positive impact on
campus life during the year.
The Roger Guptill Award is presented annually in memory of the late Dr.
Roger Guptill, minister, teacher, and Christian gentleman, to a senior class
student of the Department of Religion preparing for full-time church service.
The Mamie Lark Henry Drama Scholarship is presented annually to a
student in recognition of superior contribution to the Theatre Arts Depart-
ment.
The Mamie Lark Henry Scholarship Cup is presented each quarter to the
sorority with the highest grade-point average the previous quarter.
The Waights G. Henry, Jr. Leadership Award is given annually by the
Student Government Association to a student who has actively demonstrated
effective leadership skills. Selection of the recipient is made by a committee
composed of students, faculty, and administrators.
The Evelyn Powell Hoffman Drama Scholarship is provided by her family
in memory of their wife, mother and sister, a graduate of the class of 1930.
It is to be awarded annually to a freshman student through audition. The
selection of the recipient is to be made by the Drama Department faculty.
The Mary Hunter Lindsey Award is provided by the late Rev. William
Oliver Lindsey, Sr., in memory of his wife, Mary Hunter Lindsey, class of
1 91 4. It is awarded annually to United Methodist students entering the senior
class in college and preparing for a full-time church ministry. The selection of
the awardees is made by the faculty of the Religion Department.
The John Love Scholarship Cup is presented each quarter to the fraternity
with the highest grade-point average the previous quarter.
The Weston L. Murray Award is presented to the senior class member of
the Georgia Delta Chapter of Pi Gamma Mu who has the highest record of
achievement and contribution in the field of Social Science.
Academic Regulations and Procedures/ 83
Outstanding Achievement in Psychology Award, is presented annually
by the psychology department to the senior psychology major who, through
academic excellence and service, has made an outstanding contribution to
the field of psychology.
The Pike Award is provided by Mrs. William C. Key (Ruth Pike) and the
late Mrs. William Franklin Daugherty (Ethel Pike) in memory of Adella Hunter
and Christian Nathaniel Pike. It is awarded annually to Methodist or Baptist
students entering the senior class in college and preparing for a full-time
church vocation or majoring in Religion or Religious Education.
The Walter Malcolm Shackelford Award is presented annually to a grad-
uating senior who has majored in Education and has demonstrated outstand-
ing academic performance, leadership, and service to the College.
The Annie Moore Smith Award is a purchase award annually in visual
arts, provided by Mrs. Rebecca Moore Butler, class of 1924, in memory of
her sister, Annie Moore Smith, class of 1915.
Jean Young Award in Photography this award, granted annually, was
established in memory of Jean Young who was the first curator of the Lamar
Dodd Art Center. The award is a book on contemporary photography and is
presented to the student who has demonstrated an exceptional commitment
to photographic art.
Departmental Awards are presented annually at Honors Day in the spring.
At the time there are numerous departmental awards made.
/85
Pre-professional and
Co-operative Programs
Pre-professional Programs of Study
LaCrange College has a curriculum and environment that is well-suited to
preparation for further study in fields such as law and medicine. These pro-
grams include, but are not necessarily limited to, preparation for the following
areas.
LAW
The pre-law advising committee is chaired by Dr. Tracy Lightcap and is
composed of Dr. Lightcap, Dr. Frederick Mills, Dr. Brenda Thomas and Dr.
Kevin Reidy. Students considering attending law school should consult with
one of these faculty members beginning in their freshman year and should
meet quarterly with other students interested in pre-law. Law school bulletins
and LSAT study guides are located on the ground floor of Banks Library in
the Writing Center.
Students entering law school come from many varied undergraduate pro-
grams from English to mathematics, business administration, history or political
science. It is not really possible to say which major serves as the best prepa-
ratory background for law school. Almost every law school bulletin, however,
suggests that entering students must have a strong background in history,
political science and English as well as some preparation in economics, busi-
ness, sociology, psychology and mathematics.
DENTISTRY
Dr. John Hurd is the general adviser. Students selecting a major other than
Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd in addition to their
primary advisors for their majors. The pre-dental student should select a major
as early as possible and work toward the B.A. degree. Some dental schools
accept students with fewer than four years of college training, but most of
them prefer a student with the baccalaureate degree.
The pre-dental student should be familiar with the specific requirements
set by the dental schools to which he plans to apply. There is some variation
in the requirements of the various schools, but the minimum requirements
set by most schools of dentistry are:
86 / Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs
Inorganic Chemistry with lab 15 quarter hours
Organic Chemistry with lab 15 quarter hours
Biology with lab 10 quarter hours
Physics with lab 15 quarter hours
English 10 quarter hours
All applicants must complete the Dental Admission Test not later than the
October testing preceding the year of desired entry.
MEDICINE (M.D.)
Dr. John Hurd is the general adviser. Students selecting a major other than
Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd in addition to their
primary advisers for their majors. The pre-medicine student should select a
major as soon as possible and seek the B.A. degree. Medical schools rarely
accept candidates with less than the baccalaureate degree.
The student should familiarize himself with the requirements of the several
medical schools to which he plans to apply. Requirements vary somewhat in
the various medical schools, but the minimum requirements of most medical
schools are:
Biology with lab 15 quarter hours
General Chemistry with lab 15 quarter hours
Organic Chemistry 15 quarter hours
Physics 15 quarter hours
English 15 quarter hours
Every applicant must take the Medical College Admission Test, preferably
in the spring preceding the submission of his application to medical school,
but no later than the fall of that year.
VETERINARY MEDICINE
Dr. John Hurd is the general adviser. Students selecting a major other than
Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd in addition to their
primary advisers for their majors. The pre-veterinary student should be familiar
with the specific requirements of the school to which he plans to apply. The
minimum requirements set by most schools of veterinary medicine are as
follows:
A candidate must have completed at least 90 quarter hours of college credit
by the end of the spring quarter before fall matriculation at the veterinary
school. The B.A. degree is preferred. The following required courses must
have been completed prior to entry into veterinary school.
English 10 quarter hours
Biology with lab 10 quarter hours
Zoology or Botany 5 quarter hours
Microbiology 5 quarter hours
Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs/ 87
Biochemistry 5 quarter hours
Inorganic Chemistry with lab 10 quarter hours
Organic Chemistry with lab 10 quarter hours
Animal Nutrition* 5 quarter hours
The candidate must have worked with a veterinarian, and he must have
had hands-on experience working with large and small animals.
Each applicant will be required to take the Graduate Record Examination
(GRE) including the Advanced Biology Section and the Veterinary Aptitude
Test. These tests should be taken October or December of the year prior to
probable admission to veterinary school.
*Not available at LaGrange College
ENGINEERING
LaGrange College has an engineering-oriented program designed to pro-
vide the student with a broad liberal arts background while preparing the
student for a professional engineering program. Dual-degree programs in en-
gineering have been established with Georgia Institute of Technology and
Auburn University. Students accepted in the dual-degree program will attend
LaGrange College for approximately three academic years (a minimum of 1 46
quarter hours) and then either Georgia Institute of Technology or Auburn
University for approximately two academic years. After completing the aca-
demic requirements of the two cooperating institutions, the student shall be
awarded a bachelor's degree from LaGrange College and a bachelor's degree
in engineering from either Georgia Institute of Technology or Auburn Uni-
versity. In addition, a dual degree program is being negotiated with Mercer
University and should be in place for Fall 1 993. Those interested in the Mercer
Program should contact the Pre-Engineering Adviser.
It is strongly suggested that all students considering either the dual degree
program in engineering or transferring into an engineering program contact
the pre-engineering adviser, Professor McCoy, prior to registration.
To be eligible to enroll in the dual-degree program in engineering a student
must have a 2.3 or better grade point average. In addition to completing the
General Education Curriculum, a student in the dual degree program must
complete the courses listed below. The courses are listed in sequence for the
first two years at LaGrange College. While this order is strongly suggested, the
courses may be taken over the three years of residence at LaGrange College.
88 / Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs
Fall Quarter
MTH 122
Calculus I
ENG 101
Composition I
CHM 101
General Chemistry I
COL 101
Freshman Seminar
First Year
Winter Quarter
MTH 123
Calculus II
ENG 102
Composition II
CHM 102
General Chemistry II
HIS 101* or 111**
World or American
Spring Quarter
MTH 1 24
Calculus III
ENG 103
Composition III
SPC 105
Speech Fundamentals
HIS 102* or 112**
World or American
Computer Science 163
Microcomputers
'For students planning to attend Auburn University
'For students planning to attend Ga Tech
MTH 322
Calculus IV
PHY 121
Physics I
General Education
Electivet
or
CSC 199**
Algorithms
Second Year
MTH 323
Calculus V
PHY 122
Physics II
General Education Electivet
or
CSC 280
FORTRAN*
MTH 324
Diff Equ
PHY 123
Physics III
General Education
Electivet
or
MTH 335
Linear Algebra
tSubject to approval by the adviser
*for students planning to attend Auburn University
'*for students planning to attend Ga. Tech. Inst.
PHARMACY
The pre-pharmacy general adviser is Dr. John Hurd. Students selecting a
major other than Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd
in addition to their primary advisers for their majors.
While the admission requirements vary, the following is standard course
work as a minimum: Chemistry 101, 102, 311, 351, 352; Biology 101, 102;
Physics 101, 102; Mathematics 111, 122; English 101, 102; History 111,
112; Economics 203; Sociology 146; Speech 105. Political Science 101 may
be required, and electives in literature are suggested to make up 90 quarter
hours of academic work.
Pre-professional and Co-operative Programs/ 89
JOURNALISM
The student who plans a career in journalism needs a wide range of courses
in many areas. A recommended basic program would include approximately
20 hours in humanities, 20 hours in mathematics and science, 20 hours in
social science, and 30 hours in a major field. Specific courses to prepare for
admission to individual schools should be selected in consultation with the
adviser.
PHYSICAL THERAPY
The pre-Physical Therapy general adviser is Dr. John Hurd. Most schools
which offer training in Physical Therapy award a Bachelor's degree after suc-
cessful completion of classroom and clinical work. Students are admitted to
such programs after completion of 90 quarter hours of work including ap-
proximately 20 hours in Humanities, 20 hours in Math and Science, 20 hours
in Social Science plus 30 hours in a major field such as Biology. Specific
courses to prepare for admission to individual schools should be selected in
consultation with the adviser.
OPTOMETRY
The pre-Optometry general adviser is Dr. John Hurd. Student selecting a
major other than Biology should consult early and frequently with Dr. Hurd
in addition to their primary advisers for their majors. Though selected students
may be admitted to Optometry School after three years of preparation, most
are admitted after receiving Bachelors or Masters degrees. Optometry involves
four years of study after admission to the program and in some areas also
includes a brief internship. Majors in any academic area are acceptable though
the student should include emphasis on the sciences. Preparation for admis-
sion to a specific school can be planned with the assistance of the adviser.
ALLIED HEALTH SCIENCES
The adviser for Allied Health Science preparation is Dr. John Hurd. Allied
Health Sciences include Dental Hygiene, Dental Lab Technology, Medical
Technology, Physical Therapy, Radiologic Technology, Respiratory Therapy
among others. These programs require from 30 to 90 hours of General Ed-
ucation either within the program or prior to admission. A plan of preparation
for one of the Allied Health Sciences can be arranged with Dr. Hurd.-
/91
Departments and Courses
Table of Contents
Page
Academic Divisions 92
Abbreviations and Numbers 94
Art and Design 95
Biology 100
Business Administration 104
Chemistry 112
Christian Education (see Religion)
Computer Science 118
Criminal Justice 123
Dance 125
Economics 126
Education 130
English and Literature 138
General Science 143
Health, Physical Education, and Recreation 144
History 150
Library Science 155
Mathematics 156
Modern Foreign Language 162
Music 166
Nursing 170
Philosophy 173
Physics 174
Political Science .....175
Psychology 180
Religion 185
Sociology/Social Work 189
Speech 192
Theater Arts 193
92 / Departments and Courses
Academic Divisions
Business Administration and Economics
Professors: Cousins, Dupuy
Associate Professors: Benavides, Birkeli
Assistant Professors: Reidy, McClung
This division contains the Department of Business Administration and Eco-
nomics and the A.A., B.A., B.BA and the M.B.A. degrees are offered.
Education
Professors: Garcia, S. Johnson, Jordan, Reid, Robison
Associate Professor: Williamson
Assistant Professor: Alford, M. Smith
Instructor: Unger
This division contains the Department of Education and the Department
of Health, Physical Education and Recreation. The B.A. and M.Ed, degrees
are offered.
Humanities and Fine Arts
Professors: Hornsby, Lawrence, McCook, Murphy, Naglee
Associate Professors: Bailey, Brown, L. Johnson, Smith, Taft, Torbert
Assistant Professors: Edwards, Ensley, Harrison, Slay, Taunton, Thomas, Williams
Instructors: Lindley, Mallory, Williams
This division contains the Departments of Art and Design, English Language
and Literature, Modern Foreign Languages, Music, Religion and Philosophy
and Theater Arts. The B.A. degree is offered.
Nursing
Associate Professors: Kratina
Assistant Professors: Bates, Guy, McClellan, Sauter, Williams
The Nursing Division is also the Department of Nursing. It offers the A.A.
degree.
Natural Sciences and Mathematics
Professors: Hurd, James, Jolly, Shelhorse
Associate Professors: Duttera, Hicks, McClanahan, Morrisett, Riddle, Searcy
Assistant Professor: McCoy
Instructor: Yin
The Natural Sciences and Mathematics Division contains the Departments
of Biology, Chemistry and Physics, Computer Science, and Mathematics. The
B.A. and B.S. degrees are offered.
Departments and Courses/ 93
Social and Behavioral Sciences
Professors: Gill, T. Johnson, Kraemer, Mills
Associate Professors: Cafaro, Evans
Assistant Professors: Burdett, Frassetto, Lightcap
This division contains the Departments of History, Psychology, Political
Science, and Social Work/Sociology. The A.A. and B.A. degrees are offered.
94 / Departments and Courses
Course Numbering System
and Abbreviations
The projected schedule of classes will be followed insofar as possible, but
is subject to change.
Courses numbered 100 through 199 are intended primarily for freshmen
and sophomores. Courses numbered 200 to 299 are intended primarily for
sophomores; the number may, alternately, mean credit of less than five
quarter hours.
Courses numbered 300 through 399 and above are intended primarily for
juniors and seniors.
Courses numbered 400 through 499 are intended primarily for seniors.
The number in parentheses following the course title indicates the number
of quarter hours credit for the course.
Abbreviations
Art and Design ART
Biology BIO
Business Administration BUA
Chemistry CHM
College (Freshman Seminar) .. COL
Computer Science CSC
Criminal Justice CJU
Dance DAN
Economics ECO
Education EDU
Early Childhood EDU
Middle Childhood EDU
English ENG
French FRN
Freshman Seminar COL
General Science GSC
Geography GEO
German GER
Health, Physical Education,
and Recreation HPR
Physical Education PED
History HIS
Library Science LSC
Mathematics MTH
Music MUS
Nursing NSG
Philosophy PHL
Physics PHY
Political Science PSC
Psychology PSY
Religion REL
Sociology/Social Work SOC
Spanish SPN
Speech SPC
Theater Arts THA
/95
Art and Design
The Art and Design major consists of studio concentrations in the following
areas: Painting & Drawing, Photography, Ceramics & Sculpture and Design.
A student may choose a studio concentration in more than one area. The
courses required of the studio concentration are specific and should be de-
termined in consultation with the student's advisor when the student first
declares a major in art.
The following objectives are established as a basis for the education pro-
gram in Art at LaGrange College. These objectives also include a means of
determining deficiencies prior to graduation so that necessary steps can be
taken to correct these deficiencies.
1. Development of technical knowledge pertaining primary to the stu-
dent's chosen area of concentration, but not limited to it.
2. Each student should develop an artistic vocabulary, especially in their
specific area of concentration.
3. Assist the student in finding and focusing their creative ideas into a
consistent body of work.
4. To instruct the student in the correct means of presenting their work
in a portfolio or exhibition.
5. To give each student an understanding of graduate study in specific
studio areas.
6. Encourage the student to exhibit their work and acquaint them with
the gallery system.
7. To require a freshman review, spring quarter, consisting mainly of port-
folio evaluations.
8. To provide the students with a creative environment by using all avail-
able resources. This would include field trips to galleries and museums,
course work in locations of artistic interest, guest lectures and work-
shops related to the exhibitions in the College's galleries.
To accomplish these objectives students will take the following courses:
30 hrs. of basic course requirements of all art majors - ART 1 09, 110, 111,
151, 152, 153.
After these courses in studio (151, 152, 153) are completed students are
required to concentrate in one or two studio disciplines. The courses
required in these areas are:
AREAS OF CONCENTRATION
55 hrs. The Painting & Drawing Major - ART 171, 172 or 180, 173, 304,
311, 351, 352, 353, 356, 357.
55 hrs. The Design Major - ART 171, 172 or 180, 173, 301, 304, 311,
320, 322, 323, 341 or 6 hrs in Publications, 351.
96 / Art and Design
55 hrs. The Photography Major - ART 172 or 1 80, 173, 301, 311, 320,
323, 324, 325, 351, 352, 353.
55 hrs. The Ceramics and Sculpture Major - ART 171 or 173, 172, 180,
302, 311, 312, 327, 328, 351, 352, 353.
85 hrs. The Art Education Major Students should first be admitted to the
Undergraduate Teacher Education program which is delineated in the
Education section. Students are also required to complete at least 20
quarter hours in each Of these areas: Humanities, Social Sciences,
Natural Sciences and Mathematics.
Professional courses: Education 199, 362, 449, 459. Psychology
149, 302 and Art 171, 172, 173, 180, 312, 321, 323, 331, 490.
Students before the quarter of their graduation are required to present
their work before the faculty in a critical review. From this review work will
be selected for their senior exhibition.
Students who complete the Art and Design major have career options that
include the following:
Studio artists, advertising and illustration, textile design, production pot-
tery, commercial photography, art education.
Courses Offered:
109. Art History Survey I. (5) Fall.
An illustrated lecture course surveying the visual and plastic arts of Western Civilization from the
Paleolithic period through the Renaissance.
110. Art History Survey II. (5) Winter.
An illustrated lecture survey of the visual and plastic arts of Western Civilization from the Baroque
period to the present.
111. Art in the Twentieth Century. (5) Spring.
An illustrated survey and analysis of twentieth century painting and sculpture.
130. Publications Design I. (3) Fall.
This course will examine the concepts and techniques of creating publications culminating in
publishing the college yearbook. Topics will include principles of basic design, typography, page
layout, development of themes, use of artwork and computer techniques.
131. Publications Design II. (3) Winter.
Continuation of Publications Design I.
Prerequisite: Art 1 30
132. Publications Design III. (3) Spring.
Continuation of Publications Design II.
Prerequisite: Art 1 31 .
Art and Design/ 97
151. Drawing Fundamentals. (5) Fall.
Work with line and tonal values to create form in space.
152. Basic Design. (5) Winter.
Fundamentals of design emphasizing color and composition.
153. Three-Dimensional Design. (5) Spring.
A basic course dealing with three-dimensional structure.
171. Painting. (5) Fall.
Course dealing with specific problems in space, color and form.
172. Sculpture. (5) Winter.
Basic problems in modeling, carving and construction.
173. Printmaking. (5) Spring.
Introductory work in basic graphic media; relief and intaglio.
180. Ceramics I. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Basic work in forming clay using handbuilding and wheel throwing methods.
230. Publications Design IV. (3)
Continuation of Publications Design III.
Prerequisite: Art 130, 131, 132
231. Publications Design V. (3)
Continuation of Publications Design IV.
Prerequisites: Art 130, 131, 132, 230
232. Publications Design VI. (3)
Continuation of Publications Design V.
Prerequisites: Art 130, 131, 132, 230, 231
301. Graphic Design: Fundamentals. (5) Winter.
An introduction to the basic materials, techniques and terms of graphic design. Work will cover
the fundamentals of topography, layout, pasteup, desk top publishing and logo design.
302. Sculpture II. (5) Winter.
Work in construction and modeling using clay, wood, stone and metal.
303. Printmaking II. (5) Spring.
Work in intaglio, lithography, and silk screen processes.
304. Painting Watercolor. (5) Spring.
A course in transparent media working primarily with outdoor environments in problems dealing
with space and light.
98 / Art and Design
311. Life Drawing. (5) Winter.
Study from the model with emphasis on the human form in composition.
312. Crafts. (5) Fall.
An introductory course in the designing and fabrication of wood and metal craft objects.
320. Graphic Design: Illustration. (5) Fall.
A course focusing on the materials and techniques of illustration for books, posters and magazines.
The course will include marker, gouache, pen and ink, and computer rendering techniques.
321. Textile Design: Weaving. (5) (On demand)
Basic course in fibers and loom weaving.
322. Graphic Design: Concepts. (5) Spring.
A course exploring the development of graphic ideas through projects in advertising layout,
corporate identity, magazine and poster design and others. In-depth study of page layout through
traditional and computer techniques.
323. Photography. (5) Fall.
A basic course in black and white photographic expression including mechanics of processing
and printing.
324. Photographic Design. (5) Winter.
A course dealing with design and composition derived from photographic manipulation.
Prerequisite: Art 323 or consent of instructor.
325. Advanced Photography. (5) Spring.
Large format photography and advanced problems in exposure, lighting including color processing
and printing.
Prerequisite: Art 323 or consent of instructor.
327. Ceramics II. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Course in forming clay on a potter's wheel and firing and glazing.
328. Ceramics III. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Emphasis on ceramic design using handbuilding and wheel methods and use of glazes in deco-
rating processes.
331. Elementary and Middle Childhood Art Education. (5) Fall.
Course emphasizing the development of the child through creative visual activity.
341. Internship. (5-15) (On demand)
Directed observation and practice in professional design related environment.
351, 352, 353. Studio Concentration. (5 each) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A major individual project in one area culminating in an exhibition the last quarter of the senior
year.
Art and Design/ 99
355. Perspective Drawing. (5) Fall.
Work in linear perspective utilizing Renaissance space.
356. Life Drawing II. (5) Winter.
Specific drawing problems using the human figure as a point of departure.
357. Drawing: Color. (5) Spring.
Drawing problems using color pencils, pastels, inks and paints.
490. Student Teaching. (15) (On demand)
Supervised observation and experience in the art classroom leading to full-time teaching by the
student.
100/
Biology
Specific Objectives for the Major
The Biology faculty works with their majors to help them develop an un-
derstanding and working knowledge of the life phenomenon at subcellular
through organismic levels. Within the major, a student may elect to emphasize
human biology, field-oriented biology or biochemical and microscopic aspects
of life science.
A plan of study to help the student pursue both the individual's and the
Department's objectives is developed by consultation between the student
and his advisor.
Method of Accomplishing Objectives
The student is presumed to have accomplished the specific collection of
objectives by satisfactorily completing the courses which constitute his major.
A major in Biology consists of the following courses: Biology 101-102 and 40
more hours of biology as approved by the academic advisor; Chemistry 101-
102, 351-352; Mathematics through 111 or 122; Physics 101-102. In addi-
tion, one course from the following must be taken with the approval of the
major academic advisor; General Science 492, an advanced Chemistry
course, Mathematics 314 or 316, Physics 125.
The approved program of teacher education in secondary science with
emphasis in Biology and the professional education sequence will satisfy the
requirements for a major in Biology.
Demonstration of Accomplishment of Objectives
The Biology department continues to use the success of its graduates in
the job market and in advanced study as a gauge of the applicability of its
goals and the success of the students in attaining these goals.
Career Options
"Graduates of the College who have majored in Biology typically pursue
careers in teaching, pharmacy, medicine, dentistry or physical therapy. In
addition, many graduates find employment in industry some in laborato-
ries, some in management and others in research and development. Most
careers require further formal study in graduate or professional schools.
Course Descriptions
101. General Biology I. (3 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
An examination of the organizational and operational aspects of living systems with emphasis
upon the structure and function of vertebrates.
Biology / 101
102. General Biology II. (3 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, Spring.
A study of genetics, evolution, phylogeny, and ecology. It is strongly recommended that Bio 101
be taken first.
148. Human Anatomy and Physiology I. (5 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter.
A study of the structure and function of the human body. Laboratory work: mammalian dissection
and experiments plus human measurements.
149. Human Anatomy and Physiology II. (5 hrs. lee., 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter,
Spring.
A continuation of Biology 148.
275. Histological Technique. (4 hrs. lab per week) (2) (On demand)
A laboratory technique course designed to acquaint the student with histological preparations.
Prerequisites: Biology 101; Chemistry 101.
318. The Teaching of Science in the Secondary Schools. (5 two-hour periods per
week) (5) (On demand)
Familiarization with several approaches to science teaching in high school. (On demand)
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Physics 101-102; Chemistry 101-102. Normally open only to
juniors and seniors in the Sciences.
320. Medical Microbiology. (5 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.
A study of human diseases caused by pathogenic microbes and helminths.
321. Microbiology. (1 hr. lee, 8 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, 1995.
A study of the morphology, physiology, classification, ecology, and economics of microbial forms,
especially bacteria and fungi.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Chemistry 101-102. Chemistry 351-352 recommended.
334. Ecology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.
An introduction to the basic principles and concepts of ecology followed by population and
habitat studies.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 01 -1 02; Chemistry 1 01 -1 02; or consent of instructor. Biology 335 and/
or 336 is recommended.
335. General Zoology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1994.
A phylogenetic survey of the animal kingdom with special emphasis upon parasitology, entrom-
ology, ornithology, and mammalogy. Animal taxonomic studies based on local fauna.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Chemistry 101-102.
336. General Botany. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1995.
A phylogenetic survey of the plant kingdom with emphasis upon reproductive morphology fol-
lowed by the detailed anatomy of vascular plants. Plant taxonomic studies based on local flora.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Chemistry 101-102.
338. General Entomology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1994.
An introduction to the study of insects. Emphasis is on insect morphology, biology and identifi-
cation. A collection of insects identified to family level is required.
Prerequisite: Biology 102.
1 02 / Biology
339. Field Problems in Ecology. (5) Fall, 1993.
A study of ecological problems and environmental parameters in the local area by means of
individual investigative procedures. (On demand)
Prerequisites: Biology 334 and permission of instructor.
340. General Parasitology. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1994.
An introduction to the biology, life history and pathogenicity of parasites. Representative parasitic
protozoans, helminths and arthropods are considered.
Prerequisite: Biology 102.
351. Vertebrate Embryology. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1995.
A study of the embryological development of representative vertebrates, with laboratory emphasis
upon the chick and pig.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102.
352. Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy. (2 hrs. Iec v 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter,
1995.
A study of the structure of vertebrates with an analysis of the generalized vertebrate body plan
and specializations of this basic plan throughout the eight vertebrate classes. Lab emphasis upon
dissection of lamprey, shark, mudpuppy and cat.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102.
353. Fundamental of Evolutionary Theory. (5 hrs. lee per week) (5) Spring.
A balanced survey of the present-day concepts of the processes and products of evolution with
emphases on : 1) contrasting models and their consequences, 2) mass extinctions, 3) evolution
of man, 4) methods of science and pseudoscience, and 5) philosophical considerations.
360. Vertebrate Histology. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring, 1994.
A study of tissue types and their organization into body organs.
Prerequisites: Biology 101, Biology 352 recommended.
373. Genetics. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, 1994.
A study of the unifying concepts of biological inheritance in individuals and populations. Labo-
ratory work includes both Drosophila crosses and experiments with microbial forms.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102, 321; Chemistry 101-102, 351-352 (or enrollment therein)
374. Cell Biology. (6 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1993.
A study of the structure and function of cell organelles as well as diversity of cell types. Laboratory
work involves cell cultures and immunological experiments.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102, 321; Chemistry 101-102, 351-352 (or enrollment therein).
383. Animal Physiology. (2 hrs. Iec v 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, 1994.
A study of the physiology of vertebrates, with emphasis upon mammals. A systems approach to
mammalian solutions of physiological problems. Laboratory work involves physiological experi-
ments with frogs, rats, and human subjects.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102; Chemistry 101-102. Chemistry 351-352 recommended.
Biology/ 103
386. Plant Physiology. (2 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) (On demand)
A study of basic plant principles such as cell properties, photosynthesis, respiration, growth, and
water-mineral-soil relationships.
Prerequisites: Biology 101-102, 334, and 336; Chemistry 101-102, 351-352.
430. Environmental Science (4 hrs. lee, one 3-hr. lab per week) (5) Fall, 1994.
An introductory course bringing together the many different themes of the man-environment
field.
Prerequisites: open to juniors and seniors in any major.
104/
Business Administration
I. Introduction
The Graduate and undergraduate programs in business administration are
accredited nationally by the Association of Collegiate Business Schools and
Programs (ACBSP).
The Business Administration and Economics faculty members intend to
accomplish three primary goals, within the context of a liberal arts educational
environment, and with the highest possible level of professional competence.
The goals are to help students develop (1) increased understanding of the
nature and purposes of our business system and of our economics system and-
of the relationship of business to the socioeconomic system in which it op-
erates; (2) increased understanding of and proficiency in the major business
functions; and (3) increased understanding of micro- and macro-economic
theory and policy choices.
The program is designed to serve both the general student population and
department majors. As a contribution to the general requirements area, the
department provides an introduction to economic thought with ECO 101
Contemporary Economic Issues. The department also provides opportunities
for students majoring in other areas to supplement their curricula by taking
courses which can help them increase their understanding of the role and
functioning of business, and of our economic system. This particularly perti-
nent for majors in the Social Sciences and Computer Science.
For students who elect to move beyond this introduction and pursue a
major in business, the department offers several undergraduate degree pro-
grams. Students can pursue the A.A. degree with a major in business, a B.A.
with a major in business, and in economics; or the Bachelor of Business
Administration degree, with a concentration in either accounting, business
economics, general business management, or international business. The
department also offers course work leading to the Master of Business Admin-
istration degree (See Graduate Bulletin). The Economics program is described
in the section on Economics.
The department provides for the majors the background to enter graduate
and professional schools, and to obtain employment in a wide variety of
organizations.
II. Objectives
Business Administration For non-majors, the Business Administration
course offerings seek to provide students with the opportunity to develop a
basic understanding of business and its role in the economy, and to gain
greater knowledge of the several major functions of business.
The program for students who pursue the A.A. degree is designed to help
them accomplish a combination of a basic liberal arts foundation plus a basic
Business Administration/ 105
understanding in the fundamentals of the several major functional areas of
business.
The objective of the B.A. degree program is to provide students with a
comprehensive understanding of both the qualitative and quantitative aspects
of the functions of business, while giving them an extensive opportunity to
pursue unrelated or related course work. This is the liberal studies degree in
business. There is ample room for electives in this program. It is designed to
provide valuable and useful background for any of a wide variety of career
options which the student may elect to pursue.
The B.B.A. program is designed to provide students with both a compre-
hensive understanding of enterprise management, and an opportunity to de-
velop in-depth knowledge and proficiency in one or more specific functional
areas. This degree program provides an additional twenty quarter hours of
course work in the discipline, leading to a concentration in accounting, busi-
ness economics, general business, or international business. Many of the stu-
dents who pursue the B.B.A. degree are those who seek careers in enterprise
management, or as specialists in the specific area of concentration.
During their sophomore year students may declare their intentions to pur-
sue a major in business administration. Business administration majors should
note that the requirements for the major, including required courses, appli-
cable to them are those in effect when they declare their major, not those in
effect when they first entered the college. A passing score in a comprehensive
Departmental Assessment Test is required for graduation. This D.A.T. may be
repeated as necessary.
IN. To accomplish the objectives, students will take the following
courses:
' A. Associate of Arts (major in Business Administration)
1. General Education curriculum.
2. Business Administration 40 qtr. hrs.
BUA 160 Introductory Accounting
BUA 251 Business Law I
BUA 355 Principles of Managerial Finance (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 371 Principles of Management (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 373 Organizational Behavior (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 380 Principles of Marketing (5 cr. hrs.)
and two more 5 cr. hr. courses in Business Administration courses
at the 200 level or higher.
B. Bachelor of Arts (major in Business Administration)
BUA 160 Introductory Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 163 Managerial Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)
ECO 201 Principles of Microeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)
ECO 203 Principles of Macroeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 251 Business Law I (5 cr. hrs.)
1 06 / Business Administration
MTH 314 Statistics (5 cr. hrs.)
MTH 360 Finite Mathematics (5 cr. hrs.) (or MTH 122, or ECO-301)
BUA 355 Principles of Managerial Finance (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 371 Principles of Management (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 373 Organizational Behavior (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 380 Principles of Marketing (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 392 International Business (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 395 Junior Seminar (2 cr. hrs.)
BUA 440 Management Simulation (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 451 Senior Seminar (3 cr. hrs.)
Plus 10 additional credit hours in business/economics electives at the
300 level or higher.
C. Bachelor of Business Administration
1. Core courses:
BUA 160 Introductory Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 163 Managerial Accounting (5 cr. hrs.)
ECO 201 Principles of Microeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)
ECO 230 Principles of Macroeconomics (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 251 Business Law I (5 cr. hrs.)
MTH 314 Statistics (5 cr. hrs.)
MTH 360 Finite Mathematics (5 cr. hrs.) (or MTH 1 22, or ECO 301)
BUA 355 Principles of Managerial Finance (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 371 Principles of Management (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 373 Organizational Behavior (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 380 Principles of Marketing (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 392 International Business (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 395 Junior Seminar (2 cr. hrs.)
BUA 440 Management Simulation (5 cr. hrs.)
BUA 451 Senior Seminar (3 cr. hrs.)
Plus 10 additional credit hours in business/economics electives at
the 300 level or higher.
2. One of the following concentrations:
a. Accounting: (BUA 260-361) and two of the following courses:
BUA 362, 363, 364, 365, 366.
b. Business Economics: ECO 301 and 303 (Intermediate Micro and
Macroeconomic Theory) Plus two additional economics courses
(excluding accounting courses) at the 300 level or higher.
c. General Business (Management): Four additional business
courses at the 300 level or higher.
d. International Business: BUA 393, ECO 323, ECO 325 plus an
additional elective course to be approved by the chair of the
Business Administration department. Lastly, an academically-
based International Study Program of appropriate duration out-
side the United States is also required.
Business Administration/ 107
IV. Students who complete the majors offered in the department have found
employment in a number of organizations, including public service (military
and non-military, federal, state or local), education, manufacturing, finance
and retailing. Our graduates are self-employed, or work for small or large
organizations.
V. Course Descriptions:
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
151. Introduction to Business. (5)
A brief introduction to the origin and nature of our business system, the important purposes and
concepts involved in each of the major business functions, and the relationship of business to
our economy and to the society in which it operates.
160. Introductory Accounting. (5)
This course will introduce students to the basic concepts in accounting including the analysis of
financial statements as basis for decision making and problem solving tools.
161. Principles of Accounting I. (5)
Basic accounting systems and concepts. Accounting cycle for service and merchandising concerns:
original entries, accrual and deferral adjustments; reversing and closing processes. Preparation of
income statement, statement of owner's equity, and balance sheet. Special topics: bad debts,
inventories, and internal control of cash.
162. Principles of Accounting II. (5)
A continuation of BUA 161 with emphasis on partnership and corporation accounting, long-term
liabilities and long-term investments. Preparation of the statement of changes in financial position.
Special topics: financial statement analysis, plant assets.
Prerequisite: BUA 161, or consent of the instructor.
163. Managerial Accounting. (5)
A study of managerial control systems and the uses of accounting information for planning and
control; including analysis and interpretation of data and use of cost information for business
policy implementation.
Prerequisites: BUA 162, or consent of instructor.
251. Business Law I. (5)
A course designed to provide a knowledge of law that a student will need in business. Thestudent
begins with the constitutional background of law, a study of the law of contracts, agency and
employment, and negotiable instruments. Stress is given to the impact of the UCC.
Prerequisite: Sophomore standing, or consent of the instructor.
261. Managerial Cost Applications. (2)
A survey of financial and capital budgeting techniques. Emphasis on short-term forecasting and
control. Introduction of elements of production costs, costing techniques, CVP analysis, and
variance analysis.
Prerequisite: BUA 161, or consent of the instructor.
1 08 / Business Administration
262. Accounting Applications of Computers. (2)
Survey of general purpose accounting software available for the personal computer. Emphasis on
accounting cycle, subsidiary ledgers, and financial statement generation.
302. Applied Decision Sciences I. (5)
A study of the basic models and quantitative skills used in business problem analysis. Includes
such topics as statistical inference, optimization and programming models.
Prerequisite: MTH 360 or consent of instructor.
310. Managerial Economics. (5)
Focuses on the use of micro-economic principles and mathematical/statistical tools to make/
analyze business decisions.
Prerequisite: ECO 201 .
322. Social and Legal Environment of Business. (5)
A study of current social problems faced by business with particular attention paid to the back-
ground factors giving rise to those problems, various proposed solutions, and the approach that
is currently being followed.
Prerequisite: Senior standing, or consent of instructor.
352. Business Law II. (5)
A continuation of BUA 251. The student studies personal property and sales, government reg-
ulation of business, real property and other questions of law and business.
Prerequisite: Sophomore standing, or consent of instructor.
355. Principles of Managerial Finance. (5)
A comprehensive survey cf the basic tools and models utilized in contemporary financial man-
agement decisions.
Prerequisites: BUA 161, BUA 162 and Sophomore standing, or consent of instructor.
356. Intermediate Managerial Finance. (5)
An in-depth study of special managerial finance topics, including financial analysis, capital budg-
eting, cost of capital, and long-term financing decisions.
Prerequisite: BUA 355, or consent of instructor.
360. Intermediate Accounting I. (5)
An in-depth analysis of the accounting and reporting process and accounting theory, together
with a study of current problems in reporting financial position, income determination, and, an
integration of current professional pronouncements.
Prerequisite: BUA 162, or consent of instructor.
361. Intermediate Accounting II. (5)
A continuation of BUA 360 with emphasis on the measurement and reporting of the source(s)
of corporate capital and the relationship of these sources to income determination. Additional
topics include depreciation, depletion, amortization of intangibles, long-term investments and
debt. The impact of professional pronouncements is stressed.
Prerequisite: BUA 360, or consent of the instructor.
Business Administration 1 1 09
362. Cost Accounting. (5)
Cost accounting principles and techniques applied to job order and process systems. Planning
and control techniques such as CVP analysis, variance analysis, capital budgeting and manage-
ment decisions. Construction of static and flexible budgets.
Prerequisite: BUA 162, or consent of the instructor.
363. Advanced Accounting. (5)
A study of special topics including partnerships, installment sales, home office-branch relation-
ships, consolidated financial statements, and non-profit accounting.
Prerequisite: BUA 361, or BUA 366, or consent of the instructor.
364. Income Taxation For Individuals. (5)
An in-depth study of the tax code as it relates to individuals. Updated to incorporate new tax
laws, regulations, and printed rulings.
Prerequisite: BUA 162, or consent of instructor.
365. Auditing. (5)
Study of auditing standards, objectives and techniques. Pronouncements, ethics, reporting, legal
liability of the auditing profession are emphasized.
Prerequisite: BUA 162, or consent of the instructor.
366. Intermediate Accounting III. (5)
A continuation of BUA 361 with emphasis on current special topics in financial accounting such
as accounting for pensions, leases, accounting changes, earnings per share and income recog-
nition. Continued emphasis on professional pronouncements.
Prerequisites: BUA 360, BUA 361, or consent of the instructor.
371. Principles of Management. (5)
A course designed to afford students an opportunity to gain an understanding of the "science"
of management (the underlying body of knowledge relevant to management) including theories,
concepts, principles, techniques, and tools that apply. In addition, attention is given to the
development of examples that demonstrate the application of the "science" in specific situations
which is the "art" of management (wise application of the science). This is primarily a lecture
course but class participation in discussion is encouraged. Testing requires that students dem-
onstrate an adequate understanding of the "science" and the "art" of management.
372. Production/Operations Management. (5)
A study of the application of the science of management in the production/operations manage-
ment environment. Primary emphasis will be placed on theories, concepts, principles, techniques,
and tools that improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the production/operations manager.
Much emphasis is placed on the proper use of quantitative tools and techniques; therefore, it is
strongly recommended that students taking this course have an adequate mathematical back-
ground. Testing in this course will require that students demonstrate competence in the above-
mentioned areas.
Prerequisites: Junior standing, BUA 271 and MTH 314 or MTH 360.
373. Organizational Behavior. (5)
A study of the internal structure of organizations. Provides theoretical and conceptual framework
for analyzing individual and group behavior within organizations.
Prerequisite: BUA 371.
110/ Business Administration
374. Interpersonal Relations in Organizations. (5)
A study of human interaction in the organizational context. Topics to be covered include self-
concept, frames of reference, values and attitudes, barriers and breakdowns in communications.
Prerequisite: BUA 373 or consent of instructor.
376. Managing Human Resources. (5)
The study of the basic principles and functions of effective personnel administration, and human
resource management. Extensive use is made of the case method of study. Students gain expe-
rience looking at personnel problems, individually and as members of varying sizes of groups.
Prerequisites: BUA 373.
377. Career Management. (2)
This course provides students with an opportunity to investigate career options. Students learn
how to manage their careers under changing business and economic conditions.
Prerequisite: Junior standing.
378. Compensation Management. (3)
This course emphasizes the design, development and management of compensation systems.
Topics considered include job evaluation methods, wage and salary surveys, incentive plans and
determination of individual pay.
Prerequisite: BUA 376 or consent of instructor.
380. Principles of Marketing. (5)
An introduction to the important principles of marketing management, the marketing perspective,
marketing strategy planning, and the critical importance of this approach on the overall effec-
tiveness of the total enterprise.
381 . Advanced Marketing. (5)
Intensive study of selected aspects of marketing management, and of the role of marketing in
our economic system. Particular emphasis on helping students to further their analysis, decision-
making and communication skills in this context.
Prerequisite: BUA 380 or consent of instructor.
382. Promotion. (5)
Examination of the strategy, planning and implementation of a marketing promotion program.
Covers the three major areas of marketing persuasion; personal selling, advertising, and sales
promotions. Including analysis of media resources and public relations as basic elements in an
effective promotion campaign.
391. Managing A Small Business. (5)
A study of the application of the science of management to the development and management
of the small business enterprise. Opportunities, characteristics, and problems with the small
business will be evaluated. Students will be required to develop a business plan for a small
business and when possible students will be given an opportunity to work on special projects
with small businesses in the community. The class requires active participation by students in
and out of the classroom.
Prerequisites: BUA 355, 371, 380 or consent of instructor.
Business Administration/ 1 1 1
392. International Business. (5)
A study of the major opportunities, challenges, and approaches to increased effectiveness in the
international business area.
Prerequisites: BUA 355, 371, 380 and ECO 201, 203.
393. Cultural Aspects of International Business. (5)
A study of the cultural risks confronting the business manager in an international environment.
The course will survey differences in values and codes of behavior among a number of cultures,
giving the student an opportunity to learn how to read and respond to the organizational culture
of regulators, business associates and customers across cultural borders.
Prerequisite: BUA 392.
395. Junior Seminar. (2)
This course seeks to begin facilitating students' transition from college to the business world or
to graduate school. Emphasis is given to resume preparation, interviewing and other aspects
career/graduate school search.
Prerequisites: Junior standing with at least 30 credit hours required for major.
420. Introduction to Micro-Computer Applications to Business. (3)
A course designed to expose students to the use of special purpose and general purpose software
applicable to business.
Prerequisites: To be taken concurrently with BUA 440.
440. Management Simulation. (5)
This is the capstone course for B.A. (with major in Business Administration) and B.B.A. students.
It incorporates the use of a computer-based simulation in an effort to integrate all the functional
areas of business into one comprehensive course. Students are required to work in groups as
managers of a simulated company and make the necessary marketing, finance, economic, ac-
counting and management decisions to run their company effectively. The student's grades are
a function of individual and group performance.
Prerequisites: Senior standing, completion of all requirements (except BUA 450). In exceptional
circumstances the permission of the instructor may be obtained to waive the above requirements.
Students must have been formally accepted as a business administration major. BUA 420 must
be taken concurrently with BUA 440.
451. Senior Seminar. (3)
As one of the capstone courses the Senior Seminar seeks to promote students' integration of
major concepts covered separately in prior courses. It also serves as a follow up on the career/
graduate school search initiated in the Junior Seminar. The Departmental Assessment Test is one
of the requirements for this class.
Prerequisites: Senior Standing with at least 50 credit hours required for major.
460. Internship in Business. (5-15)
Practical experience through placement of selected majors in private/public firms or organizations.
No more than 5 credit hours per quarter for a maximum of 1 5 credit hours in internship program
may be taken.
Prerequisites: Senior standing, student must have been formally accepted as a business major.
Additionally, a G.P.A. of 3.00 or higher and/or recommendation of business department faculty.
112/
Chemistry
Chemistry is often referred to as the central science, because chemical
concepts are used throughout the other sciences. Therefore, in addition to
being a major in its own right, the study of chemistry is a part of many
curricula. The Chemistry Department focuses its introductory chemistry
courses as an element in a liberal education, a service to other departments
and the beginning of a comprehensive study of Chemistry. The department
offers both B.A. and B.S. majors as well as a minor which can lead to a variety
of future occupations. Students with majors in chemistry have gone on to
traditional pursuits such as Graduate School in Chemistry or Biochemistry,
Pharmacy, Medical School, Law School (Patent Law, Corporate Law), as well
as becoming Laboratory Technicians and Salespeople for chemistry related
industries. A growing field is Environmental Science, which is strongly founded
in chemistry.
The B.A. degree offers a broad background in chemistry while allowing
ample time for extensive coursework in other fields. The B.A. is appropriate
for those interested in one of the medical or law related professions or for
students desiring the broadest possible education as well as an emphasis in a
natural science. The B.S. program is designed for those going on to graduate
school in a chemically related field (Chemistry, Biochemistry, Molecular Bi-
ology, Chemical Physics, Environmental Chemistry) or those seeking employ-
ment as chemists after graduation. The B.S. degree is generally more highly
valued at professional schools where entrance standards are high. While the
B.S. degree is more demanding of a student's time, there is sufficient time
for electives outside the sciences.
The specific objectives for the respective degrees are as follows:
The Bachelor of Arts Degree
Students who earn the B.A. degree will be appropriately competent in the
following areas:
1 . Atomic and molecular structure and chemical bonding
2. The language of chemistry
3. Equilibria
4. Periodic relationships
5. Thermochemistry
6. Physical measurements on chemical systems
7. Experimental skills, including data organization and analysis
8. Recognition, structure and reactivity of the major organic functional
groups
9. Experimental synthesis and characterization of organic compounds by
physical and instrumental methods (including IR and NMR)
10. An overview of one or more of the following areas: analytical chem-
istry, inorganic chemistry and/or biochemistry
Chemistry/ 113
Students earn these competencies by pursuing the following courses re-
quired for Bachelor of Arts curriculum in chemistry:
Chemistry 101, 102, 103
Chemistry 351, 352, 353, 361, and 362
and fifteen additional hours at or above the 300-level
The support courses required are Physics 101, 102 or 121, 122,
Mathematics 122 and Computer Science 163
Students who earn the B.A. degree will have demonstrated their attainment
of the specific objectives by appropriate scores on the current American
Chemical Society (ACS) Exams for (1) General Chemistry and (2) Organic
Chemistry. The passing score will be at or above the 40th percentile of the
national norms for these exams or at an appropriate level, as determined by
the Chemistry Department, based on the accumulated data of the perform-
ance of LaGrange College students on these exams. The results which are in
the best interest of the student will be used. These exams will be given at the
end of the appropriate course(s) and will be offered to students up to three
additional times prior to the time of the students' scheduled graduation. The
student must attempt a retest at least once a quarter until successful comple-
tion of the exam. In the event that a student needs to repeat an exam for the
second, third or final time, evidence of preparation must be presented. Re-
examination cannot be scheduled earlier than two weeks following a previous
examination.
The Bachelor of Science Degree
Students who earn the B.S. degree will be appropriately competent in the
following areas:
1. Atomic and molecular structure and chemical bonding
2. The language of chemistry
3. Equilibria
4. Periodic relationships
5. Thermochemistry
6. Physical measurements on chemical systems
7. Experimental skills, including data organization and analysis
8. Recognition, structure and reactivity of the major organic functional
groups
9. Experimental synthesis and characterization of organic compounds by
physical and instrumental methods (including IR and NMR)
10. Volumetric and gravimetric analytical theory and practice
11. Instrumental analytical theory and practice
12. Thermodynamics
13. Chemical dynamics
14. General overview either of advanced inorganic and organic chemistry
or of biochemistry
15. The fundamentals of the research process in chemistry
11 4 / Chemistry
Students earn these competencies by pursuing the following Bachelor of
Science curriculum:
Chemistry 101, 102, 103
Chemistry 311, 312
Chemistry 351, 352, and 353
Chemistry 361, 362, 363
and 10 additional hours at the 400-leve!
Additionally, a research experience is required. This should be taken be-
tween the junior and senior years or during the first two quarters of the senior
year. This may be done on campus, in industry, or in a research university in
a summer program. Students may elect to earn 495 credit for this required
activity.
Supporting courses that are required are the following:
Mathematics 122, 123
Physics 121, 122, 123
Computer Science 163 and one programming course
Note: The scheduling of the B.S. curriculum is important. Students should
be prepared to take the physical chemistry sequence. This requires that cal-
culus be taken during the freshman year and physics during the sophomore
year. Most students choose to begin their chemistry during the freshman year.
The freshman year curriculum might be the following:
Fall Winter Spring
MTH 122 MTH 123 additional MTH
general education CHM 101 CHM 102
general education general education general education
Students who earn the B.A. degree will have demonstrated their attainment
of the specific objectives by appropriate scores on the current American
Chemical Society (ACS) Exams on five of the following eight exams or exam
groups:
1 . General Chemistry
2. Organic Chemistry
3. Analytical Chemistry
4. Instrumental Chemistry
5. Dynamics and Thermodynamics (2 exams) or Physical Chemistry
6. Inorganic
7. Biochemistry
The passing score will be at or above the 40th percentile of the national
forms for these exams or at an appropriate level, as determined by the Chem-
istry Department, based on the accumulated data of the performance of
LaGrange College students on these exams. The results which are in the best
interest of the students will be used.
Chemistry/ 1 1 5
These exams are given at the end of the appropriate course(s) and may be
repeated up to three additional times prior to the students' scheduled grad-
uation. The student must attempt a retest at least once a quarter until suc-
cessful completion of the exam. In the event that a student needs to stand
for an exam for the second, third or final time, evidence of adequate prep-
aration must be presented. Re-examination cannot be scheduled earlier than
two weeks following the previous examination.
Course Descriptions
Chemistry is a laboratory science and the department views the laboratory
experience as an essential component of those courses with an associated
laboratory. Consequently, a passing grade must be achieved in both the lec-
ture and the laboratory portions of the course to obtain a passing grade in
the course.
101. General Chemistry. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter.
A study of the foundations of chemistry including stoichiometry, atomic structure and periodicity,
molecular structure and bonding models, the gas, liquid and solid phases.
Prerequisite: MTH 1 1 1 or placement at MTH 122.
102. General Chemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter, Spring.
This course continues 101 and is a study of oxidation reduction reactions and electrochemistry,
chemical thermodynamics, kinetics, and equilibrium. The ACS exam for general chemistry is
included at the end of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 101.
103. General Chemistry III. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week (5) Fall, Spring.
This course is a continuation of Chemistry 102 with special emphasis on equilibria, thermody-
riamics, organometallics, applications of computers to chemistry, and other special topics in
chemistry. The ACS exam for General Chemistry will be given at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 102, CSC 163 and permission of the department.
311. Quantitative Analysis I. (3 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.
A study of the theory and practice of volumetric and gravimetric quantitative analyses. The ACS
exam in Analytical Chemistry will be administered at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisites: CHM 101-102.
312. Quantitative Analysis II. (3 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring (even years).
A study of instrumentation and advanced analytical techniques. The ACS exam in Instrumental
Chemistry will be administered at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 362 or permission of the department.
318. The Teaching of Science in the Secondary Schools. (5 two-hour periods per
week) (5) (On demand)
Familiarization with several approaches to science teaching in high school. (On demand)
Prerequisites: BIO 101-102; PHY 101-102; CHM 101-102. Normally open only to juniors and
seniors in the Sciences. (See also BIO 318.)
116/ Chemistry
351. Organic Chemistry I. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.
A study of the fundamentals of organic chemistry with respect to the bonding, structure, no-
menclature and reactivity of the various classes of organic compounds.
Prerequisite: CHM 102.
352. Organic Chemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.
A continuation of CHM 351.
Prerequisite: CHM 351.
353. Organic Chemistry III. (4 hrs. lee, 4 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.
A continuation of Chemistry 352. The ACS exam in Organic Chemistry will be administered.
Prerequisite: CHM 352.
361. Physical Chemistry I. (4 hrs. Iec v 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.
A study of the basic principles of Physical Chemistry including the properties of gases, thermo-
dynamics, thermochemistry, changes of state, and the phase rule.
Prerequisites: CHM 102, PHY 102 or 122, MTH 122.
362. Physical Chemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.
A continuation of 361 including electrochemistry, kinetic molecular theory of gases, ion transport,
and chemical kinetics. The appropriate ACS examination(s) will be administered at the completion
of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 361.
363. Physical Chemistry III. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Yearly
A continuation of 361-362, includes an introduction to Quantum Chemistry, Chemical Bonding,
Atomic and Molecular Structure, and Spectroscopy.
Prerequisites: CHM 362, MTH 123, PHY 103 or 123.
442. Inorganic Chemistry I. (3) Winter.
An examination in some depth of atomic and molecular structure and bonding. Symmetry aspects
are introduced and used.
Prerequisite: CHM 362 or consent of instructor.
443. Inorganic Chemistry II. (3) Spring.
A continuation of 442 with emphasis on coordination and organometallic chemistry. Chemical
periodicity is covered. The ACS in inorganic chemistry is the final exam for 443.
Prerequisite: CHM 442.
454. Qualitative Organic Analysis. (1 hr. lee, 8 hrs. lab per week) (5) (On demand)
A study of the theory and practice of the separation and identification of organic compounds by
the transformation of organic functional groups.
Prerequisite: CHM 353.
474. Chemical Synthesis and Characterization. (1 hr. lee, 8 hrs. lab per week) (5) (On
demand)
This course is concerned with the synthesis and analysis of either organic or inorganic compounds
using modern laboratory techniques.
Prerequisite: CHM 353.
Chemistry/ 1 1 7
483. Biochemistry I. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.
An introductory course in the principles of biochemistry, with emphasis on the structure and
function of biomolecules, membrane structure and function, and an introduction to metabolism
and bioenergetics.
Prerequisites: BIO 101-102; CHM 101-102, 351-352.
484. Biochemistry II. (4 hrs. lee, 3 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.
A continuation of Chemistry 483 with emphasis on cellular metabolism, fundamentals of molec-
ular genetics, and current topics in biochemistry. The ACS examination for biochemistry will be
administered at the conclusion of this course.
Prerequisite: CHM 483.
485. Biochemistry III. (2 hrs. lee., 6 hrs. lab per week) (5) Spring.
A laboratory intensive course in the modern techniques of molecular biology. The course includes
restriction analysis of DNA preparations, cloning genes, electrophoresis, Southern Blots, PCR, site
specific mutagenesis and other pertinent techniques.
Prerequisites: CHM 483, 484 or BIO 321 and 373.
118/
Computer Science
The computer science faculty members of LaCrange College have several
goals. As a service to the general student population, courses are offered to
acquaint students with the impact of computers on society and the ways in
which computers are used. For students who want to further study in com-
puter science, a minor and two major programs are offered.
Computer science majors in the B.A. and B.S. degree programs should:
1. be able to write programs in a reasonable amount of time that work
correctly, are well documented, and are readable;
2. be able to determine whether or not they have written a reasonably
efficient and well-organized program;
3. know what general types of problems are amenable to computer so-
lution, and the various tools necessary for solving such problems;
4. be able to assess the implications of work performed either as an in-
dividual or as a member of a team;
5. understand basic computer architectures;
6. be prepared to pursue in-depth training in one or more application
areas or further education in computer science.
7. In addition, students in the computer science track of the B.S. degree
program should be able to do research, be able to convey technical
ideas in a clear writing style, and have the mathematical background
necessary for scientific problem-solving. Students in the business track
of the B.S. degree program should have the knowledge of the functional
areas of business necessary for working in that environment.
To accomplish these objectives, students will do the following: in order to
be a major in the Computer Science Department, a student must have a CPA
of 2.25 or better. The student may elect to pursue a B.A. degree, one of two
tracks in a B.S. degree (either the computer science track or the business
track), or a minor. For all options mentioned, students must take CSC 161,
199, 299, and one of the following three courses: CSC 280, 285, or 296
(except that the business track of the B.S. degree requires CSC 285). All
students at LaGrange College are required to take CSC 163 as a general
requirement.
All of the 100-level or above courses in computer science and in mathe-
matics which are required for the B.S. and B.A. degrees and the minor must
be completed with a grade of C or better, and the average in these courses
for those pursuing the B.S. degree must be at least 3.0.
Additional requirements for the B.A. degree include eight 300-level, or
above, computer science courses including CSC 300, 305, and 325; and four
mathematics courses including MTH 122, 123, and two of the following: MTH
124, 335, 370, 410, and either 314 or 316.
Additional requirements for the computer science track of the B.S. degree
are ten 300-level, or above, computer science courses including CSC 300,
305, 325, and either 470 or 495; five mathematics courses including MTH
Computer Science / 1 1 9
122, 123, and three of the following: MTH 124. 335, 370, 410, and either
314 or 316; and five additional hours in computer science. PHY 101/102 or
121/122 must be taken as general requirements.
Additional requirements for the business track of the B.S. degree include
CSC 286, 300, 495, and three of the following: CSC 315, 325, 405, 415,
425, and 430; BUA 161, 162, 355, 371, 380, 420, and 440. MTH 122;
MTH 360 or BUA 372; and MTH 314 or 316 (316 preferred). ECO 101 must
be taken as a general requirement.
Additional requirements for the minor include four 300-level, or above,
computer science courses, including CSC 300.
The accomplishment of these objectives will be demonstrated by the fol-
lowing:
1 . satisfactory performance on a programming test. This test will be based
on the concepts learned in CSC 199 and 299 and should be taken at
the end of the quarter in which the student completes CSC 299. The
test will be offered once at the end of every quarter in which CSC 299
is offered. The test must be satisfactorily completed by the end of the
quarter in which the student reaches a total of 1 35 hours of coursework,
but under no circumstances will the student be allowed to take the test
more than four times prior to and including that quarter. If the test has
not been completed satisfactorily by that time, the student will not be
allowed to continue in either the B.A. or the B.S. degree programs in
computer science.
2. satisfactory performance on a comprehensive test administered by the
Computer Science Department. This test will cover concepts learned
in CSC 161, 163, 199, 280/285/296, 299, 300 and, in addition, will
cover selected topics from other 300-level, and above, computer sci-
ence courses. The test must be taken first in the quarter in which the
student reaches a total of 135 quarter hours of coursework. It will be
offered once per quarter; however, a student is allowed to take the
test a maximum of four times prior to his or her scheduled graduation.
Upon failure to satisfactorily complete the test in four attempts, the
student will not be allowed to graduate with a major in computer
science.
Students who complete the computer science major have a wide range of
employment opportunities. These include positions in sales, programming,
and data processing and control. Graduates of the computer science degree
program at LaGrange College have secured positions as systems engineers,
data processing managers, systems analysts, customer service representatives,
and computer technicians, as well as other positions. Companies employing
these graduates include Milliken & Co., Bell South, Texas Instruments, General
Motors, the U.S. government, the state of Florida, Hughes Aircraft, West Point
Pepperell, Total System Services, and others.
In addition, a number of graduates have gone on to graduate school in
areas such as computer science and electrical engineering.
120/ Computer Science
Course Descriptions
151. Basic Programming. (5)
An introduction to programming and algorithm development using the language BASIC.
160. Introduction to Networks and UNIX. (1)
A course designed to teach students how to use the LaGrange College network and the basic
UNIX commands needed to use the network effectively.
161. Introduction to Editing and System Languages. (2)
This course is designed to assist and familiarize the student with the operating system of a mini-
computer and with the various editing techniques that are available. The course is designed for
computer science students and for those who need to learn the UNIX operating system.
NOTE: This course may be repeated once by any student who took it prior to Fall Quarter
1987.
1 63. Introduction to Microcomputers. (2)
This course is designed to assist and familiarize the student with the operation of a personal
computer and the operation of a disk operating system (DOS). This course also covers personal
computer applications such as database systems, word processors, and spreadsheets.
164. Advanced WordPerfect. (1)
The study of WordPerfect involving more advanced techniques than in CSC 163.
Prerequisite: 163.
165. Advanced Lotus. (1)
The study of Lotus 1-2-3 involving more advanced techniques than in CSC 163.
Prerequisite: CSC 163.
199. Introduction to Algorithmic Design. (5)
Problem solving and algorithmic design in a procedural language (Pascal). Structured program-
ming concepts, debugging and testing, documentation.
280. FORTRAN Programming. (5)
The study of FORTRAN, a language used primarily in science, mathematics and engineering.
285. COBOL Programming I. (5)
The study of COBOL, a language used primarily in business data processing applications. Emphasis
on information retrieval problems. Team project required.
286. COBOL Programming II. (5)
Advanced programming concepts with a strong emphasis on ISAM files and interactive program-
ming.
Prerequisite: CSC 285.
296. C Programming. (5)
Advanced programming concepts using the language C, which is a general-purpose language
implemented on a UNIX operating system.
Prerequisite: CSC 199 or any 200-level CSC course.
Computer Science / 1 2 1
299. Algorithmic Design. (5)
A continuation of CSC 199. Further development of techniques for program design, program
style, debugging and testing, especially for larger programs. Introduction to algorithmic analysis.
Introduction to the basic aspects of string processing recursion, internal search/sort methods, and
simple data structures.
Prerequisite: CSC 199.
NOTE: CSC 199 IS A PREREQUISITE FOR ALL OF THE FOLLOWING COURSES
300. Introduction to Computer Systems. (5)
Computer structure and machine language, assembly language programming. Addressing tech-
niques, macros, file I/O, program segmentation and linkage, assembler construction, and in-
terpretive routines.
305. Introduction to Computer Organization. (5)
Basic logic design, coding, number representation and arithmetic, computer architecture, and
computer software.
315. Introduction to File Processing. (5)
Concept of I/O management (fields, keys, records, and buffering). File organization, file opera-
tions, and data structures. Time and storage space requirements. Data security and integrity.
Prerequisite: CSC 300 or 325 or consent of instructor.
325. Data Structures. (5)
Review of basic data structures such as stacks, queues, lists, and trees. Graphs and their appli-
cations. Internal and external searching and sorting. Memory management.
331. Organization of Programming Languages. (5)
An introduction to the structure of programming languages. Language definition structure, data
types and structures, control structures and data flow. Run-time consideration, interpretive lan-
guages, lexical analysis and parsing.
Prerequisite: CSC 300 or consent of instructor.
335. Digital Computer Architecture. (5)
Structures for the central computer are studied; arithmetic logic units, machine language features,
information transfer, memory heirarchy, channels, etc.
Prerequisite: CSC 305.
370. Discrete Mathematical Structures in Computer Science. (5)
An introduction to the mathematical tools for use in computer science. These include sets,
relations, and elementary counting techniques. Algebras and algorithms, graphs, monoids and
machines, lattices and Boolean algebras, groups and combinatorics, logic and languages will also
be involved.
Prerequisite: MTH 123 or consent of instructor.
405. Database Management Systems Design. (5)
Introduction to database concepts. Data models, normalization, data description languages, query
facilities. File organization, index organization, file security, and drta integrity and reliability.
Prerequisite: CSC 315 or consent of instructor.
122/ Computer Science
410. Numerical Methods. (5)
Introduction to numerical analysis with computer solution. Taylor series, finite difference calculus,
interpolation, roots of equations, solutions of linear systems of equations, matrix inversion, least-
squares, numerical integration.
Prerequisite: MTH 124 or consent of instructor.
415. Advanced Program Design. (5)
A formal approach to techniques in software design and development. Includes structured pro-
gramming concepts, organization and management of software development. A large-scale soft-
ware project will be developed by students working in teams.
Prerequisite: CSC 325.
420. Theory of Programming Languages. (5)
Review of grammars, languages, and their syntax and semantics. Scanners, parsers, and transla-
tion.
Prerequisite: CSC 331.
425. Algorithms. (5)
A study of problems and their algorithmic solution. Algorithms will be chosen from areas such as
combinatorics, numerical analysis, systems of programming, and artificial intelligence. Domain
independent techniques will also be included.
Prerequisite: CSC 325.
430. Computer Graphics. (5)
Graphics characteristics and graphics-related language features. Animation. Software tools for
computer graphics. Analytic geometry and computer graphics. Basic of 3-D graphics. Hidden line
and hidden surface routines.
Prerequisite: CSC 300 or consent of instructor.
450. Operating Systems. (5)
A course in systems software that is largely concerned with operating systems. Such topics as
process management, device management, and memory management are discussed, as are
relevant issues associated with security and protection, networking, and distributed operating
systems.
Prerequisite: CSC 300.
451-2-3. Special Topics. (5)
This series of courses will provide the student with material not covered in the courses above.
Topics such as telecommunications, microcomputer interfacing, artificial intelligence, automata
theory, survey of modern languages, fourth-generation languages, operating systems, and object-
oriented design will be covered.
Prerequisite: Determined by topic.
470. Research in Computer Science. (1-5)
Research project or paper in computer science. Designed for those students who need it to fulfill
the research component of the B.S. degree in computer science. Student must present a course
description in writing to the department chairman to be approved by the end of preregistration
during the quarter prior to enrolling for the course.
495. Independent Study. (5)
/ 123
Criminal Justice
A student may seek an Associate of Arts degree in criminal justice or may
elect criminal justice courses as part of another program.
Students completing an A.A. degree will have a general education liberal
arts orientation with a basic theoretical and practical understanding of the
criminal justice system.
To accomplish these objectives students will take the following courses:
1. Completion of four hours of physical education or its equivalent, or
criminal justice/sociology electives.
2. Satisfactory completion of the general education curricula.
3. Satisfactory completion of the following Criminal Justice core courses:
Criminal Justice 101 Introduction to Law Enforcement 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 102 Introduction to Corrections 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 103 Police Administration 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 301 Criminal Law I 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 302 Criminal Law II 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 303 Criminal Investigation 5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 306/Dual listed Sociology 306 Juvenile Delinquency
5 hrs.
Criminal Justice 307/Dual listed Sociology Criminology 5 hrs.
Total Hours - 95
In addition to the above listed requirements the accomplishment of the
A.A. objectives will be demonstrated by an interview with an examination by
a panel of selected law enforcement officers.
Students who complete the A.A. degree in Criminal Justice have career
options that include:
1 . Law Enforcement
2. Correctional Services
Course Descriptions:
100. Firearms Familiarization. (2)
This course provides the criminal justice student with the basic knowledge of proper use and safe
handling of a handgun for the purpose of self-defense within the boundaries of the law.
101. Introduction and Law Enforcement. (5)
A very broad orientation and introduction to the field of law enforcement.
102. Introduction to Corrections. (5)
A course designed to provide an overview of the United States correctional system.
103. Police Administration. (5)
A study of policy organizations and their related managerial functions.
1 24 / Criminal Justice
104. Introduction to Police Operations. (2)
A course designed to provide students with the basic knowledge of how a police department
functions within the realm of city ordinances, state and federal laws.
301. Criminal Law I. (5)
An overview of criminal procedure from arrest and trial through appeal.
302. Criminal Law II. (5)
A review and analysis of the elements of American criminal statutes.
303. Criminal Investigation. (5)
A study of the scientific, procedural and intuitive aspects of the investigation of crimes against
persons and property.
306. Juvenile Delinquency. (5)
An analysis of the nature and causes of juvenile delinquency and an evaluation of treatment or
preventative programs in this area of behavior.
307. Criminology. (5)
A study of criminal behavior and its treatment. An overview of treatment of the offender by
means of imprisonment, probation, and parole.
/ 125
Dance
The following courses in dance are offered. Dance courses fulfill the general
education physical education requirements.
106. Folk and Square Dance. (1)
Experiences in the techniques of various forms of folk and square dancing.
140. Beginning Tap. (1)
An introduction to the basic techniques and skills of tap as they apply to musical theater.
150. Beginning Jazz. (1)
An introduction to the basic techniques and skills of jazz as they apply to musical theater.
151. Intermediate Jazz. (1)
A continuation of DAN 150.
160. Beginning Ballet I. (1)
An introduction to the basic techniques and skills of classical ballet. This course incorporates
barre exercises stressing correct placement and conditioning of muscles basic to balletic control,
along with center floor exercises emphasizing skills learned at barre.
161. Beginning Ballet II. (1)
A continuation of Beginning Ballet I, increasing the variety of steps learned.
162. Beginning Ballet III. (1)
A continuation of Beginning Ballet II, combining more steps in center floor practice.
163. Intermediate Ballet I. (1)
Classical ballet class consisting of barre and center floor work introducing epaulement, adage,
pirouettes, petite allegro and grand allegro combinations.
164. Intermediate Ballet II. (1)
A continuation of Intermediate Ballet I.
165. Intermediate Ballet III. (1)
A continuation of Intermediate Ballet II.
170. Advanced Ballet. (1)
The most challenging level of classical ballet consisting of a more intricate barre and center,
increases of tempo, multiple pirouettes and tours, and more sustained adages. The student will
work not only upon clarifying technique but performing aplomb as well.
126/
Economics
I. Introduction:
The Economics and Business Administration faculty members intend
to accomplish three primary goals, within the context of a liberal arts
educational environment, and with the highest possible level of profes-
sional competence. The goals are to help students develop (1) increased
understanding of the nature and purposes of our business system and of
our economic system, and of the relationship of business to the socio-
economic system in which it operates; (2) increased understanding of
and proficiency in the major business functions; and (3) increased un-
derstanding of micro- and macro-economic theory and policy choices.
The program is designed to serve both the general student population
and department majors. As a contribution to the general requirements
area, the department provides an introduction to economic analysis with
ECO 101. Contemporary Economic Issues. The department also pro-
vides opportunities for students majoring in other areas to supplement
their curricula by taking courses which can help them increase their
understanding of the role and functioning of business, and of our eco-
nomic system. This is particularly pertinent for majors in the Social Sci-
ences and Computer Science.
For students who elect to move beyond this introduction and pursue
a major, the department offers several undergraduate degree programs.
Students can pursue the A.A. degree with a major in business; a B.A.
with a major in business, or in economics; or the Bachelor of Business
Administration degree, with a concentration in either accounting, busi-
ness economics, or general business management. The department
also offers course work leading to the Master of Business Administration
degree.
The department provides for the majors the background to enter grad-
uate and professional schools, and to obtain employment in a wide
variety of firms.
II. Objectives:
Economics:
For non-majors, the Economics course offerings seek to provide stu-
dents with a general understanding of basic economic principles and to
supplement their major field of study with elective courses in various
areas of applied economics.
For majors, the Economics curricula seeks to prepare students for
professional careers in the private or public sector as well as to prepare
them for additional academic endeavors in Economics or Business
Administration at the graduate level.
Students completing a major in Economics will have a thorough un-
derstanding, at the intermediate level, of micro- and macro-economic
Economics 1 127
theory and policy choices plus a solid foundation in quantitative analysis.
They will also be well informed in the historical development of eco-
nomic thought and will have surveyed various specialized areas of ap-
plied economics.
III. To accomplish the objectives students will take the following courses:
Bachelor of Arts (major in Economics)
ECO 201 Principles of Micro-economics
ECO 203 Principles of Macro-economics
ECO 301 Intermediate Micro-economics
ECO 302 History of Economic Thought
ECO 303 Intermediate Macro-economics
ECO 325 International Economics
ECO 331 Money and Banking
ECO 395 Junior Seminar
ECO 451 Senior Seminar
15 additional hours in economics or selected MTH courses with ad-
visor's approval.
MTH 314, Statistics
MTH 122, Anal. Geometry & Calculus I
IV. The accomplishment of these objectives will be assessed after an inten-
sive review of the student's progress and accomplishments. The student
will demonstrate this competence by a satisfactory score on a compre-
hensive examination, which may include both written and oral segments.
This comprehensive Departmental Assessment Test will be taken as part
of the Senior Seminar.
V. Students who complete the majors offered in the department have found
employment in a number of organizations, including public service (mil-
itary and non-military, federal, state or local), education, manufacturing,
finance and retailing. Our graduates are self-employed, or work for small
or large organizations.
VI. Course Descriptions:
101. Contempoary Economic Issues. (5)
This is a basic economics course for non-majors. It is designed to provide students with an
understanding of introductory economics principles to analyze, from an economics perspective,
issues such as the population explosion, poverty, energy, pollution, unemployment, inflation, etc.
201. Principles of Micro-economics. (5)
Price Theory: the study of the economic behavior of individual households and firms. Distribution
Theory: The study of how factor prices are determined. Price and output decisions are examined
under various types of market structures.
203. Principles of Macro-economics. (5)
General introduction to economics, the determination of the aggregate levels of income, out-
put, employment and prices and the examination of fiscal and monetary policies.
128/ Economics
301. Intermediate Micro-economics. (5)
At the intermediate level, analysis of the processes by which the behavior of individuals and firms
under different market conditions affects the allocation of resources in a market-oriented econ-
omy.
Prerequisite: ECO 201, or consent of instructor.
302. History of Economic Thought. (5)
Attempts to relate the history of economic thought to the intellectual tendencies of various periods
in an effort to explain how and why economic thought evolved at a given time.
Prerequisites: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.
303. Intermediate Macro-economics. (5)
At the intermediate level, analysis of the factors that determine the general level of prices, output,
and employment as well as an examination of fiscal and monetary policies in an open economy.
Prerequisite: ECO 203, or consent of instructor.
310. Managerial Economics. (5)
Focuses on the use of micro-economic principles and mathematical/statistical tools as basis for
analyzing business decisions.
Prerequisite: ECO 201, or consent of instructor.
312. Economic History of the United States. (5)
A study of the economic development of the United States, from colonial times to the present.
Attention is paid to the influence of individuals, geography and institutions to the economy of
the United States.
322. Social and Legal Environment of Business. (5)
A study of current social problems faced by business with particular attention paid to the back-
ground factors giving rise to those problems, various proposed solutions, and the approach that
is currently being followed.
Prerequisite: Senior standing, or consent of instructor.
323. Comparative Systems. (5)
A study, and an evaluation of the theories underlying present day economic systems. Factors
relating to the development of sample economies are explored. Policies currently being followed
as well as proposed changes are discussed, with respect to maintenance of full employment,
distribution of income and economic growth.
Prerequisites: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.
325. International Economics. (5)
A study of the different theories of international trade and evaluation of the effects of regional
economic integration and restrictions to world trade. An examination of the mechanisms of
international payments, the foreign exchange markets and balance of payments adjustments
under different exchange rate systems.
Prerequisites: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.
331. Money and Banking. (5)
Study of banking and other financial institutions, as well as the examination of different schools
of thought on monetary policy and theory.
Prerequisite: ECO 203, or consent of instructor.
Economics/ 129
332. Public Finance. (5)
Analysis of the impact of governmental expenditures, taxation and credit upon production and
the distribution of income. Examination of the structures of the federal, state and local tax systems.
Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.
342. Government and Business. (5)
A study of the interrelationships between the public and private sectors the relationship
between government and business, between government and labor, and government and agri-
culture. An examination of the reasons for, and the development of legislation, and case law
relating to the relationship between the public and private sectors. A study of the rise of admin-
istrative law, and the regulatory agencies.
Prerequisites: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.
343. Labor Economics. (5)
A study of the problems of wages and employment, from both a micro- and macro-economic
approach. An examination of the goal of full employment in relationship to fiscal policy. A study
of labor market considerations. A study of organized labor and collective bargaining.
Prerequisites: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.
395. Junior Seminar. (2)
This course seeks to begin facilitating students' transition from college to the business world or
to graduate school. Emphasis is given to resume preparation, interviewing and other aspects
career/graduate school search.
Prerequisites: Junior standing with at least 30 credit hours required for major.
451. Senior Seminar. (3)
As one of the capstone courses the Senior Seminar seeks to promote students' integration of
major concepts covered separately in prior courses. It also serves as a follow up on the career/
graduate school search initiated in the Junior Seminar. The Departmental Assessment Test is one
of the requirements for this class.
Prerequisites: Senior Standing with at least 50 credit hours required for major.
460. Internship in Economics. (5-15)
Practical experience through placement of selected majors in private/public firms or organizations.
No more than five credit hours per quarter for a maximum of 15 credit hours may be taken in
internship.
Prerequisites: Senior major in economics, 3.00 or higher G.P.A. and/or recommendation of
business/economics department faculty.
130/
Education
Introduction
The department of Education offers a wide range of courses to meet a
variety of needs and demands. The education curriculum at LaGrange College
serves four basic purposes.
1) to provide for development of those professional understandings and
abilities which are essential to the professional role to be assumed by
the student.
2) to provide planned and carefully guided sequences of laboratory ex-
periences where the student will have opportunities to translate theory
into action.
3) to provide programs in Early Childhood Education, Middle Childhood
Education, Secondary Education, and Art Education at the undergrad-
uate level which are approved by the Georgia Professional Standards
Commission.
4) to provide programs leading to the Master of Education degree in Early
Childhood Education and Middle Childhood Education which are fully
accredited by the Southern Association of Colleges and Schools and the
Georgia Professional Standards Commission.
Teacher Certification
LaGrange College offers a variety of degree programs which are approved
by the Georgia Professional Standards Commission and lead to certification
in Georgia. Students desiring to be certified upon completion of their pro-
grams should plan to work especially closely with their advisers since certifi-
cation requirements are subject to change.
At the undergraduate level, completion of an approved program conducted
by the college qualifies a student to be certified at the NB-4 level. Upon
graduation applicants may qualify for Performance-Based certification (PBT-
4) by attaining a qualifying TCT score and demonstrating acceptable perform-
ance by an on-the-job assessment.
Master of Education programs (Please see Graduate Bulletin).
Admission to Undergraduate Teacher Education
In order to be admitted to Teacher Education, a student must meet the
following criteria:
A. Have an overall GPA of 2.25 or better.
B. Writing proficiency a grade of C or better in English 101, 102, and
103.
C. Oral proficiency a grade of C or better in a speech course. (Spc 105)
D. Past performance a recommendation from a former college profes-
sor.
Education/ 131
E. Prognosis for success an evaluation during Education 199, Intro-
duction to Education pertinent to:
a. attendance
b. attitude
c. cooperation
d. oral and written delivery skills
e. enthusiasm for teaching, etc.
F. Complete the form for admission to Teacher Education and file in the
registrar's office.
G. Students who have taken the majority of the course work for their major
at another college in history, mathematics, English, chemistry, biology
or art must post a satisfactory score on the Georgia Teacher Certification
Test or they will be asked to take additional undergraduate course work
in their discipline as a condition to being admitted to Teacher Educa-
tion.
A student that has not met all the above criteria may be admitted provi-
sionally provided he or she has an overall GPA of 2.25 or better. The student
admitted provisionally has three quarters in which to meet all of the criteria.
A student may not register for an advanced course requiring a laboratory
experience until all criteria for admission have been met. An education major
whose GPA drops below 2.25 will be placed on departmental probation and
has two quarters in which to remove the probationary status. Failure to do so
may result in being dropped from the teacher education program.
General Education Requirements
All students planning to complete approved programs of Teacher Education
to qualify for a teaching certificate must complete at least 20 quarter hours
in the humanities and social sciences outlined below. Additionally, 10 quarter
hours in Natural Sciences and 10 quarter hours in mathematics are required.
It should be noted that English 101, 102, 103 and Speech 105 are prereq-
uisites for admission to undergraduate Teacher Education and are not counted
as part of this 60 quarter-hour requirement.
Humanities
Drama
English
Fine Arts
Foreign Languages
Music
Philosophy
Religion
Speech
Social Sciences
Economics
Geography
History
Political Science
Psychology
Sociology
Natural Sciences
and Mathematics
Biology
Chemistry
Earth Science
Geology
Mathematics
Physics
132/ Education
Curricula for Professional Education
The curricula outlined for teacher education candidates are so arranged
that a student may qualify for certification in Art Education, Early Childhood
Education, Middle Childhood Education, or Secondary Education as approved
by the Georgia Professional Standards Commission. For secondary certification
planned programs are offered in English, History, Mathematics, Biology and
Chemistry.
To complete an approved program of teacher education in any field, these
steps must be followed: (1) admission to Teacher Education, (2) admission to
student teaching at the beginning of the quarter prior to student teaching, (3)
an overall 2.25 GPA in the Bachelor's degree program, (4) a C or better in
all courses applied to the teaching field and in the professional education
courses, and (5) application for the teaching certificate at the end of the final
quarter. Conferences with the student advisor are required at each step.
OBJECTIVES
Approved Program in Early Childhood Education
Students completing the Early Childhood Education Major will:
1) develop a thorough understanding of the social, intellectual, physical,
and emotional development of the child from birth to approximately
eight years
2) identify the nature of learning and behaviors involving the young child
3) construct a curriculum appropriate to the needs of the young child
4) utilize existing knowledge about parents and cultures in dealing effec-
tively with children
5) gain a thorough knowledge of the fundamental concepts of appropriate
disciplines and to relate them to the young child's understanding
6) identify the value, place and responsibilities of para-professionals in the
differentiated teaching staff
7) develop his maximum potential through the provision of a succession
of planned and guided experiences
In order to achieve these objectives, students will take the following
courses:
Professional courses: Education 199, 342, 360, 365, 449, 459, 490C.
Specialized subject matter: Art 331; Education 317, 319, 341, 355, 456,
458; Health and Physical Education 320, 331.
Education/ 133
Approved Program in Middle Childhood Education
Students completing the Middle Childhood Education Major will:
1) demonstrate knowledge of middle grade learners in actual learning
situations
2) identify appropriate instructional strategies and created environments
to meet the social, emotional, physical and academic needs of individ-
ual children and small groups of children with diverse cultural back-
grounds
3) understand research, professional practices, issues, trends and literature
essential for effective teaching throughout the teaching field with
special emphasis on the middle grades (4-8)
4) understand diagnostic tools and approaches necessary for assessing
needs of individual students, planning to meet those needs, and eval-
uating individual growth
5) be aware of need to modify instruction and change strategies based on
the learning outcomes of previous activities
6) demonstrate appropriate professional traits in terms of classroom man-
agement, discipline, preparedness, and interaction with co-workers
In order to achieve these objectives, students will take the following
courses:
Professional courses: Education 199, 363, 449, 459, 490M; Psychology
302, 304.
Core courses: Education 318, 322, 355, 455 and 457.
Specialized subject matter: A major concentration in a subject area of
twenty-five quarter hours and a minor concentration in a second subject area
of twenty quarter hours. Concentrations must be selected from the following;
Mathematics, Language Arts, Sciences or Social Studies.
Approved Programs in Secondary Education
In secondary education a major is required in the chosen teaching disci-
pline. Approved programs are listed in this catalogue under the major de-
partment. The Education Department cooperates with other departments in
counseling students about their choice of majors. The objectives for each area
of specialization is listed in the catalogue under the major department.
In order to achieve the objectives, the student will take the following
courses:
Professional courses: Education 199, 362, 449, 459, 490S; Psychology
302, 304.
Additionally, a method's course, taught by the Department in which a
student is majoring is required. Education 355 is required for English certifi-
cation.
Courses in English: All courses required for the major.
Courses in secondary science (Biology): Biology 1 01 , 1 02 and 40 additional
hours of Biology approved by the major adviser; Chemistry 101, 102, 351
1 34 / Education
and 352; Physics 101, 102 and 103, Math through 111 or 122 and 314 or
316; Biology 318. This program satisfies the requirements for a major in
Biology.
Courses in secondary science (Chemistry): Chemistry 101, 102, 103, 351,
352, 353, 361, 362, and 15 additional hours in Chemistry; fifteen hours of
Biology; Computer Science 163; fifteen hours of Physics; Mathematics 122;
and Chemistry 318. This program satisfies the requirements for a B.A. major
in Chemistry.
Courses in History: History 101, 102, 111, and 112; two courses from
307, 308, 310 and from 330, 331, 332, 372, 374, 375; History 490, Senior
History Seminar; History 360, Social Science Methods and three additional
courses at the 300 level in History. One 300 level course in two of the
following areas: Economics, Sociology, Political Science. The Department
strongly recommends that students seeking certification select History 315
and 306 as electives and background for the Georgia Teacher Certification
Test.
Courses in Mathematics: Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 306, 310, 316, 322,
333, 335, 340, plus two additional mathematics courses as approved by the
department chairman. Also, Computer Science 151 and 163 are required.
Approved Program in Art Education
The Art Education curriculum is designed to meet the State of Georgia
requirements for kindergarten through twelfth grade teacher certification in
art.
The objectives for students who complete the approved program in Art
Education are:
1) to be competent in a wide range or expressive media and have an
understanding of the traditions of particular media
2) to be aware of and be able to present the means, through visual expres-
sion, to humanize a growing technological society
3) to be sensitive to a wide array of visual expression and be able to relate
historically, culturally, and ethnically to various forms of image, sym-
bolic and representation
4) to be cognizant of various methodologies for teaching art and be able
to discern the best methods for diverse teaching requirements
5) to present art and art-related activities as vocational and avocational
objectives
6) to be teachers who are themselves practicing artists and active in pro-
moting the visual arts in their communities.
In order to achieve these objectives, students will take the following
courses:
Professional courses: Education 199, 362, 449, 459; Psychology 149, 302,
and Art 171, 172, 173, 180, 312, 321, 323, 331, 490.
Education/ 135
CAREER OPTIONS
Students who complete an Education Major should be well-prepared to
teach in their chosen fields as well as pursue an advanced degree. Education
Majors have many career options. Some jobs taken by recent graduates in-
clude management and supervisory positions in business and industry, flight
attendants, travel agents, day care directors, and teachers and directors of
church related pre-school programs.
Course Descriptions
199. Introduction to Education. (5)
An introduction to the field of education.
Prerequisite to all other education courses.
*317. Science for Early Childhood Teachers. (5)
An introduction to the process of concept formation in science for the pre-school child by means
of science observations and explanation of the natural world.
*318. Science in the Middle School. (5)
An introduction to the major ideas and accomplishments in all fields of science, with particular
reference to the needs of science, with particular reference to the needs of the middle childhood
teacher.
319. Mathematics for Early Childhood Teachers. (5)
A study of mathematical concepts unique to early childhood education.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122 or permission of adviser.
322. Mathematics for Middle School Teachers. (5)
A study of mathematical concepts unique to middle school education and effective techniques
and procedures of instruction.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 1 22 or permission of adviser.
341 . Early Childhood Music and Creative Activities. (5)
Selection and presentation of activities for young children in art, music, science, literature, and
related fields which aid in the development of cognitive competency.
342. Child Development. (5)
Basic principles of child growth and development from birth to 9 years. Studies theories of child
development; and physical, cognitive, language, and social development. Special emphasis on
impulse control, ego development, and discipline techniques for young children.
*355. Teaching of Reading. (5)
Foundations course for the teaching of reading. Examines teaching strategies, different approaches
to reading, assessment procedures, and classroom organizational patterns in terms of their effect
upon the child's expected course of reading development. Emphasis on diagnosis of reading
problems, prescription for their remediation, and strategies for implementation. Field experience
required.
Mb I Education
*360. Early Childhood Curriculum and Methods. (5)
Considered theories, values, and practical aspects of curriculum development. Explores the use
of planning tools, assessment techniques, learning objectives, and taxonomies. Studies methods
of classroom procedure, functional units, use of various types of media, and evaluation of pupil
growth. Field experience in grade K-4 required.
Prerequisite: Education 449 or permission of instructor.
*362. Secondary Curriculum and Methods. (5)
A general methods course for prospective secondary teachers. Appropriate specific subject-matter,
problems of curricula, classroom management, supervised study, and observation in public sec-
ondary schools.
Prerequisite: Education 449 or permission of instructor.
*363. Curriculum in the Middle Schools. (5)
A course for Middle Education majors dealing with basic principles of curriculum development.
Supervised observation in middle childhood classrooms.
Prerequisite: Education 449 or permission of instructor.
365. Practicum in Early Childhood Development. (5)
Focuses on children and families in a multicultural, multiracial, multiethnic American society with
a particular emphasis on development of children as growing human beings. Examines strategies
for working with parents and providing parent education. Field experience required.
Prerequisite: Education 342
372. Methods of Classroom Management. (5)
A course designed to assist students in investigating and evaluating the relationship between
teacher effectiveness and classroom management. Specifically how teacher planning, organiza-
tion, and effectiveness relate to classroom management. Emphasis will also be given to various
roles expected of a teacher, alternative approaches to classroom discipline, both large and small
group organization, and awareness of teacher stress, causes, and related problems.
449. Microteaching Using Media. (5)
The theory, preparation, and utilization of multi-sensory aids. Instructional aids will be the basis
for student conducted micro teaching.
*455. Language Arts in the Middle School. (5)
A course dealing with methods of teaching the language arts skills with emphasis on listening,
speaking, writing and reading competencies.
*456. Children's Literature and Language Arts. (5)
A course dealing with basic approaches and competencies in the teaching of children's literature
and language arts skills.
*457. Social Studies in the Middle School. (5)
Objectives, methods, content, and materials in middle school social studies programs.
*458. Social Studies in the Elementary School. (5)
Objectives, methods, content, and materials in elementary school social studies programs.
Education/ 137
459. Introduction to Pupils with Special Needs. (5)
A study of identification and diagnostic techniques for teachers as related to areas of exceptionality
among students and of alternative styles of teaching to meet special needs.
t490C. Early Childhood Student Teaching. (15)
Prerequisites: September Experience, senior status; and approval of the Chairman of the Ed-
ucation Department.
t490M. Middle Childhood Student Teaching. (15)
Prerequisites: September Experience, senior status; and approval of the Chairman of the Ed-
ucation Department.
t490S. Secondary Student Teaching. (15)
Prerequisites: September Experience, senior status; and approval of the Chairman of the Ed-
ucation Department.
* Restricted to Education Majors.
138/
English Language and Literature
INTRODUCTION
The Department of English Language and Literature offers a wide range of
courses to meet a variety of needs and demands: English for foreign students;
journalism; business and technical writing; English literature, American liter-
ature, and continental literature in translation; freshman composition; and
basic review. The aim of the Department is to teach proficiency in the use of
the English language and to acquaint students with the best of their literary
heritage. In our decade of increased specialization and highly restricted cur-
ricula for future lawyers, physicians, engineers, and business executives, it is
misleading to assume that the student interested in language and literature
has no career options outside the field of education. While many dedicated
people find teaching to be a satisfying livelihood, there is documentary evi-
dence "that training in English and literature, particularly at the college level,
is invaluable preparation for futures in four outstanding professional areas:
law, medicine, business and federal service" (See English: The Professional
Major by Linwood Orange. This pamphlet, published in its fourth edition by
the Modern Language Association of America, 1986, is available in the De-
partment of English and in the Office of Admission.)
The Department of English Language and Literature has established a Writ-
ing Center which is located in Banks Library. This center serves the college
community by providing advice and critique for student papers. The center
is directed by qualified professionals who direct the upperclass students serv-
ing as writing peers or writing fellows. The hours of the center are posted.
OBJECTIVES
All students at LaGrange must take courses in basic composition and in
literature. The primary objectives are for all students to
(1) demonstrate proficiency in expository writing with standard English
grammar, punctuation, and usage.
(2) demonstrate proficiency in critical reading.
(3) demonstrate ability to assimilate, organize, and develop ideas logically
and intelligently.
(4) understand rudiments of research-based writing.
(5) become acquainted with the best of Western society's literary heritage.
Either English 104 or 105 is a prerequisite to the major in English, which
consists of English 302 (Advanced Grammar), English 335 (Shakespeare), and
nine additional courses at 300-level or above. English 302 and 335 are offered
once each year. Other courses are offered on an alternating basis so that a
major-level student has a balanced but wide selection from which to choose
his nine "elective" courses.
English Language and Literature/ 139
ACCOMPLISHMENT OF OBJECTIVES
For the major and non-major, each student will pass 3 courses in Readings
and Composition, demonstrating competent reading and writing skills (See
"Objectives" on previous page).
Additionally for the English major, there will be an exit examination to be
completed before the student is eligible for graduation. During the junior year
each student must take the ETS Major Field Achievement Test in Literature
in English. At least one quarter prior to graduation each student is required
to take the ACAT for Literature in English.
Course Descriptions
010. English for International Students I. (12) with lab Fall.
A course to introduce students to American culture and to familiarize them with principles of
grammar, syntax, and paragraph writing. A laboratory, equivalent to two (2) hours credit, will
emphasize auditory perception, vocabulary comprehension, and oral conversation.
011. English for International Students II. (5) Winter.
A continuation of ENC 01 with emphasis on oral conversation and extended writing assignments,
organizing the material in standard rhetorical patterns.
100. English Review. (3) (On demand)
Reading practice, sentence and paragraph writing and review of grammar and mechanics.
101. Readings and Composition I. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Effective expository writing, with the reading of selected prose from Western philosophy. A review
of grammar is included.
Prerequisite to all higher-numbered English courses.
102. Readings and Composition II. (3) Fall, Winter Spring.
A continuation of ENC 101, with reading selections from Western philosophical thought, sup-
plemented with selected poems, short stories, & essays.
Prerequisite to all higher-numbered English courses.
103. Readings and Composition III. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Advanced expository writing, with the addition of the term report. Readings in the humanities,
the natural sciences and technology, and the social sciences.
Prerequisite to all higher-numbered English courses.
104. English Literature I. (5) (On demand)
An examination, in historical context, of selected masterpieces of English literature from Beowulf
to the eighteenth century.
Prerequisite. This course or ENC 105 prerequisite to all 300-level English courses.
105. English Literature II. (5) (On demand)
The works of British writers of the Pre-Romantic, Romantic, and Victorian periods.
Prerequisite: This course or ENC 104 prerequisite to all 300-level English courses.
140 / English Language and Literature
106. Masterpieces of American Literature I. (5) (On demand)
A study, in historical context, of selected masterpieces of American literature to 1865.
107. Masterpieces of American Literature II. (5) (On demand)
A study of selected masterpieces of American literature from 1 865 to the present.
108. Backgrounds of World Literature. (5) (On demand)
The reading and examination of selected literature in translation from the Classical to the Modern.
151. Journalistic Writing. (2) (On demand)
An introduction to basic types of writing for newspapers and magazines: news, feature, interview,
review, and editorial. Assignments directed toward possible publication in area newspapers. May
be repeated for credit.
151X. College Newspaper Journalism. (1) (On demand)
A workshop for preparation and publication of The Hilltop News. May be taken independently
of ENC 1 51 and repeated for credit.
153. Business and Technical Writing. (5) (On demand)
A study of the basic skills needed to prepare business letters and technical reports, with significant
attention to a review of the fundamentals of English grammar.
255. 256. Writing About Film. (3 credit hours each) (On demand)
A film authors series, emphasizing important foreign and American films and approaches to
writing about them.
300. Methods of Teaching English in the Secondary School. (5) (On demand)
A course dealing with the basic approaches and practical competencies in the teaching of lan-
guage skills and literature.
302. Advanced Grammar. (5) Winter.
An intensive analysis of the traditional approach to grammar with attention to historical origins
and an examination of structural and transformational-generative variations in the analysis of
grammar. Required for the major in English.
310. Creative Writing. (5) (On demand)
Practice in imaginative writing poetry and fiction. Analysis of some professional writing, but
emphasis on student work.
311. Advanced Literary Theory and Composition. (5) (On demand)
An introduction to literary theory and analysis of fiction and poetry.
313. Continental Backgrounds. (5) (On demand)
An examination of major classics, in modern translation, of Creek, Roman, Medieval, and Ren-
aissance literature to about 1616.
314. Masterpieces of Continental Literature. (5) (On demand)
Major European classics in translation from the Renaissance through the nineteenth century.
English Language and Literature/ 141
315. Contemporary Latin American Literature. (5) (On demand)
A survey of Latin American prose and poetry since 1945, including writers from Mexico, Brazil,
Colombia, Chile, and Guatemala.
320. The Age of Chaucer. (5) (On demand)
A survey, mostly in Middle English, of English literature to about 1500, including selected works
of Chaucer.
323. History of the English Language. (5) (On demand)
The historical development of the language, a study of its structure and its relation to other
tongues.
335. 336. 337. Shakespeare. (5) Spring.
The development of Shakespeare's art, as reflected in selected individual plays or groups of plays.
Required for the major in English.
340. English Literature of the Renaissance. (5) (On demand)
Renaissance English literature to about 1675, excluding Shakespearean drama.
345. Milton. (5) (On demand)
Selected poetry and prose of Milton.
350. Restoration and Eighteenth-Century English Literature. (5) (On demand)
Selected Restoration, Neoclassical, and Pre-Romantic English literature, excluding the novel.
351. The English Novel in the Eighteenth Century. (5)
A study of the rise of the English novel with an emphasis upon selected works of the late
seventeenth century and eighteenth century novelists.
361. The English Novel in the Nineteenth Century. (5) (On demand)
A study of selected works of Romantic and Victorian novelists.
363. Romanticism in English Poetry. (5) (On demand)
A study of the works of selected major nineteenth century British poets, with emphasis upon lyric
verse.
364. Victorian Poetry. (5)
A study of the works of selected major Victorian poetry, with emphasis on Tennyson, Browning,
and the Pre-Raphaelites.
370. Modern British Literature. (5) (On demand)
The poetry of Hopkins, Hardy, Housman, Eliot, and Yeats; fictional prose since Hardy.
391. American Literature I. (5) (On demand)
Major Romantic writers of the United States through Whitman and Dickinson.
142 / English Language and Literature
392. American Literature II. (5) (On demand)
Major writers of the Realistic and Naturalistic movements in the United States.
393. American Literature III. (5) (On demand)
Major writers of the United States since World War I.
394. Southern Literature. (5) (On demand)
A study of major Southern writers from about 1815 to the present.
/ 143
General Science
The General Science courses are service courses for all academic areas of
the College. Those students desiring to fulfill the 1 0-hour Science requirement
in the General Education Curriculum should take GSc 101 and GSc 102 in
sequence. Those fulfilling the 5-hour additional option may take either GSc
101 or GSc 102.
101. Earth Science I. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
An introduction to the concepts, principles, and processes of Physical Geology, with a brief
consideration of Historical Geology.
102. Earth Science II. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
An introduction to concepts, principles, and processes of Astronomy.
492. History of Science. (5) (On demand)
A survey of the path taken by investigators in science through the ages and the influence of their
culture of their work and thought. Primarily a library-discussion course to provide an integrated
viewpoint of the various science disciplines. Normally open only to upper division science stu-
dents.
144/
Health, Physical Education, and
Recreation
The curriculum in Health, Physical Education, and Recreation is composed
of two programs. The physical education activities program offers a selection
of physical skills classes. These classes are designed to promote physical skill
development as well as knowledge in a variety of activity areas including
physical fitness and conditioning, dance, aquatics, lifetime leisure pursuits,
and traditional team sports. Four quarter hours of physical education activities
are required. Students must select four different activities to meet this re-
quirement. Additional hours may be elected. (NOTE: A student may take a
particular activity course more than once and receive credit toward the hours
needed for graduation. However, only one hour earned for that course counts
toward fulfilling the physical education requirement.)
In addition, a 30-hour coursework minor in Health, Physical Education,
and Recreation is available to any student. Students completing the minor in
Health, Physical Education, and Recreation will (1) demonstrate knowledge
of the profession of health, physical education, and recreation; (2) understand
professional practices, issues, trends, and literature essential for effective
teaching and coaching; (3) demonstrate appropriate professional behaviors
for classroom management and/or athletic coaching. This minor is designed
in consultation with the Department Head in Health, Physical Education, and
Recreation.
151. Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation. (5) (On demand)
Introduction to the fields of physical education and recreation.
152. Camping Activities. (2) Spring, 1994
Study of various camping and outing skills and activities.
153. Camp Leadership and Program. (3) Spring 1994
A study of camping in an organized setting and of the leadership skills necessary for the imple-
mentation of the camp program.
154. Standard First Aid/CPR. (2) Winter, 1994.
Identification of emergency situations and selection of correct response. Certification in American
Red Cross standard first aid and adult cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.
155. Lifeguard Training. (3) Fall, 1993.
Develop competencies in swimming and lifeguarding techniques, swimming speed and endur-
ance. American Red Cross lifeguard training certification.
Prerequisites: Current Standard First Aid Certification; Advanced swimming skills (PED 125 or
equivalent).
Health, Physical Education, and Recreation/ 145
200. Community Health. (2) Winter, 1994.
An investigation of various health care programs available in the community and various health-
related issues.
201. Community Recreation. (2) Spring, 1994.
An investigation of various recreation facilities available in the community.
210. Fitness for Life. (2) Fall, 1993.
A study of basic principles of physical conditioning, weight control, relaxation, and stress man-
agement. Students will have the opportunity to devise and implement a personalized fitness/
weight control program tailored to individual needs and levels of fitness.
302. Organization and Administration of Recreational and Physical Education Pro-
grams. (5) Winter, 1994.
A study of the organization and administration of instructional, intramural, and interscholastic
activity programs. Special emphasis on the selection, purchase, and care of safe equipment and
facilities.
305. Psychology of Coaching. (5) Fall, 1994.
An investigation of the techniques of coaching, with special attention given to personalities and
motivations.
306. Techniques of Sports Officiating. (5) Spring, 1994.
Techniques of officiating athletic events; knowledge of the rules of selected sports.
307. Movement Exploration. (3) (On demand)
A study of the perceptual-motor development of the young child. A variety of activities to enhance
this development included.
310. Skills for Teaching and Coaching Interscholastic Athletics. (5) (On demand)
Analysis of teaching skills and techniques of the different interscholastic sports in high schools.
313. Recreation Leadership. (5) (On demand)
A study of the leadership skills necessary to implement recreation programs and to conduct various
recreational functions.
320. Methods in Health and Physical Education in the Elementary School. (5) Fall, 1 993.
A study of the objectives, materials, activities, and curricula appropriate for elementary schools
physical education and health. Supervised observation and practical experiences in the elemen-
tary schools.
321. Methods in Health and Physical Education in the Secondary School. (5) (On de-
mand)
A study of the objectives, materials, activities, and curricula appropriate for secondary school
physical education and health. Supervised observation in the secondary schools.
146 / Health, Physical Education, and Recreation
330. First Aid, Safety, and Athletic Training. (5) Spring, 1994.
Examination of techniques of accident prevention and treatment of minor injuries. Practical
experience with prevention and treatment of athletic injuries; certification in cardio-pulmonary
resuscitation.
331. Health Education. (5) Winter, 1994.
A study of basic issues and principles in health. Topics include fitness, diet and weight control,
nutrition, human sexuality, stress management, death education, aging, drug and alcohol edu-
cation.
340. Adapted Physical Education. (5) (On demand)
Identification of common handicapping conditions. Study and practical application of procedures,
organization, materials, and activities for corrective work with individuals in the classroom setting.
350. Tests and Measurements in Physical Education. (5) Fall, 1993.
Selection, administration, and interpretation of physical measurements and tests. Principles of
written and skill test construction are emphasized.
351. Sports Statistics. (5) (On demand)
The study of keeping statistical charts and various scorebooks for athletic events.
390. Seminar and Lab Practice in Physical Education or Recreation. (1-5) Fall, 1993.
Leadership experience under staff supervision; problems seminar.
400. Field Placement in Recreational Management. (5-15) (On demand)
Directed observation and participation in recreational management and supervisory situations.
Prerequisites: senior standing, recommendation by the Department Head in Health and Phys-
ical Education.
Health, Physical Education, and Recreation/ 147
Physical Education Activities
Physical education activities may be repeated if a student has completed
the general education curriculum (four different activity courses).
Dance may be used to fulfill requirements for Physical Education Activities
in the General Education curriculum.
Physical Education Activities are waived for the following students:
A. Veterans who present to the office of the Registrar official evidence of
having completed the basic training program in some branch of the
Armed Forces. A maximum of four physical education activity courses
will be waived; one for each two months served in the Armed Forces.
B. Transfer students who have satisfactorily completed requirements for a
Junior College degree or who have satisfactorily completed four differ-
ent physical education activity courses.
C. Students who are 30 years of age or older.
D. Married women with children.
Note: Waiver of the requirements for activity courses does not diminish
the overall requirements for graduation (195 quarter hours required for a
baccalaureate degree).
102. Beginning Archery. (1) Coed.
Basic competencies in archery techniques and safety with experiences in target shooting.
103. Badminton. (1) Coed.
Introduction to the skills, strategies, and rules of badminton.
104. Basketball. (1) Coed.
Basic competencies in the techniques, strategies, and rules of basketball.
105. Jogging. (1) Coed.
Participation in progressive running programs designed to increase cardiovascular endurance.
106. Folk and Square Dance. (1) Coed.
Experiences in the techniques of various forms of folk and square dancing.
107. Bowling. (1) Coed.
Introduction to the basic skills and rules of bowling. Course conducted at local bowling lanes.
108. Physical Conditioning. (1) Coed and Men.
Basic assessment, maintenance, and improvement of over-all physical fitness.
109. Beginning Golf. (1) Coed.
Introduction to the basic skills, strategies, and rules of golf. Field trips to city golf courses.
111. Softball. (1) Coed.
Basic competencies and knowledge of rules and strategies of slow-pitch softball.
148 / Health, Physical Education, and Recreation
112. Beginning Tennis. (1) Coed.
Introduction to the basic skills, strategies, and rules of tennis.
114. Volleyball. (1) Coed.
Basic competencies in the techniques, strategies, and rules of volleyball.
116. Trimnastics. (1) Women.
Introduction to diet and weight control techniques as well as assessment and maintenance of
personal fitness.
120. Karate. (1) Coed.
Basic competencies and skills in karate techniques.
121. Bicycling. (1) Coed.
Introduction to the basic equipment, safety, and techniques of cycling including training and
racing strategies. Weekend field trips.
122. Weightlifting/plyometrics. (1) Coed.
Introduction to exercises that are geared toward increasing speed, power, and jumping ability.
A basic overview of the physiological factors involved in the exercises will be included.
123. Beginning Swimming. (1) Coed.
Introduction to the aquatic environment with emphasis on competence in primary swimming
and safety skills and stroke readiness.
124. Intermediate Swimming. (1) Coed.
Development and refinement of key swimming strokes. Introduction to turns, surface dives, and
springboard diving.
Prerequisite: PED 123 or equivalent skills.
125. Advanced Swimming. (1) Coed.
Refinement of key swimming strokes. Develop competencies in advanced rescue and springboard
diving.
Prerequisite: PED 1 24 or equivalent skills.
156. Canoeing. (1) Coed.
Fundamental canoeing skills emphasized. Field trips to lake facilities and overnight camping
experience are provided to give extensive opportunities for recreational canoeing.
157. Beginning Water Skiing. (1) Coed.
Extensive on-the-water experiences introduce students to the basic techniques and safety con-
siderations of water skiing.
158. Backpacking. (1) Coed.
Introduction to basic equipment, safety, and techniques of trail camping. Extensive field trips to
state and national trails.
Health, Physical Education, and Recreation/ 149
159. Sailing. (1) Coed.
Basic sailing competencies and understanding with experiences in fundamental racing strategy.
Field trips to lake facilities.
160. Snow Skiing. (1) Coed.
Introduction to basic techniques, safety, and equipment of snow skiing. Field trips to area ski
facilities.
161. Rhythmic Aerobics. (1) Coed.
A conditioning course in which exercise is done to musical accompaniment for the purpose of
developing cardiovascular efficiency, strength, and flexibility.
162. Hiking, Orienteering, and Camping. (1) Coed.
Introduction to basic techniques of tent camping, map, and compass work. Field trips to nearby
campgrounds and forest lands.
150/
History
The faculty of the Department of History believe that all persons, whatever
their selected role in life, require an understanding of their past in order to
prepare for their future. The faculty firmly believe that the liberal arts prep-
aration, which encompasses courses from the discipline of history, provides
the student with the most appropriate educational background for life by
integrating knowledge from the broadest range of disciplines. The objective
of the Department of History is to provide each student at LaGrange College
with knowledge of the historical forces which have shaped civilization as we
know it.
To achieve the objective set forth above, the faculty seeks to:
(A) provide every student with a basic understanding of the historical forces
which have contributed to the development of civilization.
(B) develop in every student an understanding and appreciation of their
civilization which is a part of the world community.
The faculty of the department believe that students who select to complete
a major course of study in history should have the foundation knowledge and
understanding of the discipline, developed by classroom instruction and in-
dividual study, necessary to provide them with the opportunity to:
(1) pursue graduate study within the discipline.
(2) pursue a professional degree in a selected field of study.
(3) pursue employment as a teacher in pre-collegiate education.
(4) seek employment in a field such as government, entry level historic
documentation and preservation, social or historic entry level research,
or a field where their liberal arts preparation can be beneficially util-
ized.
Graduates of the Department of History may be found pursuing careers in
business, law, education, politics and government, broadcasting, journalism,
the ministry and other fields of endeavor. In all of these endeavors our grad-
uates have found that their education has provided a foundation for their
careers and for their growth in life.
The Department of History offers the following major in history:
(A) From the general education curriculum:
HIS 101 and 102, World Civilization and
HIS 111 and 112, United States History
These are required courses for the major
We strongly encourage the history major to pursue the widest possible
liberal arts preparation by the careful selection of courses from the general
education structure.
History 1 151
(B) Two courses from:
HIS 307 Social and Intellectual History of the United States
HIS 308 American Diplomatic History
HIS 310 Constitution History of the United States
Two courses from:
HIS 330 History of Rome
HIS 331 Middle Ages
HIS 332 Renaissance and Reformation
Two courses from:
HIS 372 Eighteenth Century European History
HIS 374 Nineteenth Century European History
HIS 375 Twentieth Century European History
HIS 490 Senior History Seminar is required of all majors
35 hours
(C) An additional fifteen hours of 300- and 400-level History courses are
required. The total major course requirements are 50 quarter hours
credit beyond 100-level courses.
The approved program of teacher certification in history consists of History
101 and 102, 111 and 112, completion of the major, History 360 (social
science methods), and the professional education sequence. All students, who
plan to teach should take History 315, Georgia History. Teacher certification
requirements also require that at least one upper level course be completed
in two of the following disciplines: political science, economics, sociology.
Success in achieving the objectives established for the major will be dem-
onstrated as follows:
(1 ) Successful completion of each major course with a grade of C or better.
(2) Successful completion of the senior history seminar and defense of the
senior thesis before the students and faculty of the department.
(3) For those seeking certification in secondary education in the social
science, attaining a satisfactory score on the teacher criterion reference
test in social sciences.
(4) Successful completion of a major field examination during their senior
year.
Those wishing to major in history are encouraged to declare their major
by the beginning of the winter quarter of their sophomore year. Successful
completion of History 1 01 -1 02 and History 111-112 before entering the ma-
jor is highly desirable.
1 52 / History
Upper level courses in history, those numbered 300 or above (with the
exception of His 490) are available to all students who have successfully
completed ten hours from the history offerings in the general requirements.
101. World Civilization: I. (5) Fall, Winter.
A survey course on the development of world civilization up to 1660.
102. World Civilization II. (5) Winter, Spring.
A survey course on the development of world civilization from 1660 to the present.
111. History of the United States to 1 865. (5) Fall, Winter.
Emphasis on the Colonial, Revolutionary, early national, and Civil War periods.
112. History of the United States, 1865 to the Present. (5) Winter, Spring.
Emphasis on Reconstruction, liberal nationalism, New Deal, and postwar periods.
201. Ideas That Changed the World. (2)
A study of contributions of eight world figures whose lives changed their society and ours.
205 Men and Movements That Shaped American History. (2)
A biographical study of American History.
306. History of the South. (5) (On demand)
Emphasis on the antebellum, Civil War, Reconstruction, and New South periods.
307. Social and Intellectual History of the United States. (5) Spring 1994.
A review of ideas and patterns of thought, the role of social, ethnic, and racial groups, and the
major institutions of American society.
308. American Diplomatic History. (5) Winter, 1994.
Emphasis on the procedure for developing foreign policy as well as diplomatic history. (See also
Political Science 308.)
310. Constitutional History of the United States to Present. (5) Fall, 1993.
An analysis of fundamental constitutional development from 1 776 to present. (See also Political
Science 310.)
Prerequisites: HIS 111 and 112.
312. Economic History of the United States. (5) Spring.
American economic development from colonial times to the present. (See also Economics 312.)
315. Georgia History. (5) Summer.
A study of Georgia History from the pre-colonial period to the present with emphasis on the
historical, social, economic and political development of the State. (Students seeking teacher
certification are urged to enroll.)
History/ 153
330. The History of Rome, 753B.C.-476A.D. (5) Fall, 1993.
This course is a comprehensive study of the history of Roman civilization from its origins in the
mid-eighth century B.C. to its decline and fall in the fifth century A.D.
331. The Middle Ages, 500-1350. (5) Winter, 1994.
This course offers a comprehensive study of the development of medieval civilization from the
late fifth century to the late fourteenth century.
332. The Renaissance and the Reformation, 1350-1600. (5) Spring, 1994.
This course offers a detailed study of the civilization of Renaissance and Reformation Europe.
Primary focus will be placed on the artistic and religious achievements of the period 1350 to
1600.
333. The Medieval Papacy. (5) (On demand)
This course will examine the history of the papacy in the Middle Ages and its impact on medieval
civilization.
334. Medieval Kings and Queens. (5) Winter, 1995.
A survey of medieval kings and queens and their influence on the development of medieval
civilization.
335. Renaissance and Renascences. (5) Spring, 1995.
An examination of the great cultural revivals from the age of Charlemagne to the age of Mi-
chelangelo.
340. Russia to 1801. (5) Fall, 1993.
A comprehensive survey of the Russian historical development from the appearance of the Kievan
State in the 9th century through the reign of Paul I in 1801.
341. Nineteenth Century Russia. (5) Winter, 1994.
An examination of the Imperial Russian state during the 1801-1914 period.
343. Twentieth Century Russia. (5) Spring, 1994.
An examination of the forces which resulted in the collapse of the Russian Autocracy as well as
the subsequent emergence and development of the Soviet State. (See also Political Science 543.)
360. Social Science Methods. (5) (On demand)
A general survey course in methodology for the prospective secondary teacher. (Required for
students seeking teacher certification in history.)
361. History of England to 1689. (5) Fall, 1994.
The political, economic, social, and cultural history of England from 55 B.C. to 1689 A.D.
362. History of England from 1689 to the Present. (5) Winter, 1995.
The political, economic, social and cultural history of England from 1689 to the present.
372. Eighteenth Century Europe: 1660-1815. (5) Fall, 1992.
A comprehensive survey of European History from the reign of Louis XIV through the French
Revolution and the Napoleonic era.
154/ History
374. Nineteenth Century Europe: 1815-1914. (5) Winter, 1993.
A comprehensive survey of European History from the reconstruction of the European order in
1 81 5 to the outbreak of World War I.
375. Twentieth Century Europe: 1914 to Present. (5) Spring, 1993.
A comprehensive survey of European History from the outbreak of World War I to the present.
378. European Diplomatic History: 1890 to the Present. (5) (On demand)
A detailed examination of European international relations from 1 890, the end of the Bismarckian
system to the present. (See also Political Science 378.)
416. Twentieth Century America. (5) (On demand)
An intensive study of the United States during the twentieth century.
478. Contemporary Europe. (5) (On demand)
An examination of European history focusing on major issues since 1945.
490. Senior History Seminar. (5) Spring.
A study of historiography and research methods and materials.
Prerequisites: Senior History Major or permission of the professor and the Chairman of the
Department. This course may only be attempted twice.
/ 155
Library Science
No major nor minor program is offered in Library Science.
Course Description
200. Library Orientation and Research. (2)
A systematic introduction to the William and Evelyn Banks Library including the cataloging system,
database research capabilities and other components of academic libraries.
156/
Mathematics
The goal of the mathematics department is to help students become critical
thinkers and effective problem solvers while they are mastering a certain body
of mathematical knowledge.
Students can pursue the Bachelor of Arts degree with a major in mathe-
matics or a Bachelor of Science degree with a major in mathematics. Students
who pursue the Bachelor of Arts degree have more options in selecting their
courses. This is the liberal studies degree in mathematics. Students who com-
plete the Bachelor of Arts degree usually seek careers in areas such as banking,
general business, and secondary education.
A more in-depth degree is earned by students in the Bachelor of Science
program. Students who complete the Bachelor of Science degree usually enter
graduate schools or pursue industrial positions.
The specific objectives for the respective degrees are as follows:
The Bachelor of Arts Degree
1. Illustrate the concepts of function, limit, and continuity
2. Define and illustrate the derivative, the integral, and the fundamental
theorem of calculus
3. Apply concepts and techniques of calculus to analyze functions and
solve problems
4. Develop the concepts of sequences and series
5. Employ the concepts and properties of two- and three-dimensional
spaces
6. Illustrate the process of measurement
7. Employ the standard algorithms using properties of the number systems
involved
8. Develop appropriate models
9. Develop problem-solving strategies
10. Apply the concepts and skills of programming in solving problems
11. Illustrate and analyze a wide variety of mathematical applications
12. Describe data and make appropriate inferences
Students develop these competencies by pursuing the following course
requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree in mathematics:
Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 322
Mathematics 306, 316, 333, 335, 380
plus three additional courses selected from Mathematics 305, 310, 323,
324, 334, 340, 342, 343 and 344, as approved by advisor.
The support courses required are Computer Science 151 or 199.
Students who earn the Bachelor of Arts degree in mathematics will have
demonstrated their attainment of the specific objectives by satisfactory per-
formance on the Mathematics subject test to the Graduate Record Examina-
tions.
Mathematics /1 57
The Bachelor of Science Degree
Students who earn the Bachelor of Science degree in mathematics will be
able to:
1. Illustrate the concepts of function, limit, and continuity
2. Define and illustrate the derivative, the integral, and the fundamental
theorem of calculus
3. Apply concepts and techniques of calculus to analyze functions and
solve problems
4. Develop the concepts of sequences and series
5. Employ the concepts and properties of two- and three-dimensional
spaces
6. Illustrate the process of measurement
7. Employ the standard algorithms using properties of the number system-
involved
8. Develop appropriate models
9. Develop problem-solving strategies
10. Apply the concepts and skills of programming in solving problems
11. Illustrate and analyze a wide variety of mathematical applications
12. Describe data and make appropriate inferences
13. Give examples of abstract structures
14. Demonstrate theorem-proving skills in abstract algebra and real anal-
ysis.
Students develop these competencies by pursuing the following course
requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree in mathematics:
Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 316, 322, 323, 333, 334, 335, 342, 343,
380, plus one additional course selected from Mathematics 305, 306, 324,
344, and 410
- The support courses are:
Physics 121, and 122. (recommended)
Computer Science 151 or 199.
Students who earn the Bachelor of Science degree in mathematics will
have demonstrated their attainment of the specific objectives by satisfactory
performance on the Mathematics subject test of the Graduate Record Ex-
aminations.
Students who plan to complete an approved program of teacher education
must include the following courses: Mathematics 122, 123, 124, 322', 306,
310, 316, 333, 335, 340, plus two additional mathematics courses as ap-
proved by the department chairman; Psychology 149, 302, and 304; Edu-
cation 199, 362, 449, 459, and 490S; Computer Science 151 or 199; and
Speech 105.
A minor in mathematics consists of the following courses: Mathematics
122, plus five additional courses selected from Mathematics 123, 124, 306,
314, 316, 322, 323, 324, 333, 334, 335, 342, 343, 344, 360, and 380.
At least three of the six courses must be 300 level courses.
158/ Mathematics
100. Basic Math. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.
An overview of basic skills in mathematics including ratio and proportion, percent, use of fractions
and decimals, systems of measurements and linear equations.
110. Fundamentals of Mathematics I. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A study of logic, relations, functions, measurement, finite difference, systems of equations, prob-
ability, permutations, combinations, and an introduction to descriptive statistics.
111. Fundamentals of Mathematics II. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A study of polynomial, algebraic, exponential, logarithmic and trigonometric function and an
introduction to coordinate geometry.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 110 or two units of college preparatory mathematics.
122. Analytic Geometry and Calculus I. (5) Fall, Winter.
A study of analytical geometry, limits, continuity, the derivative with application.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or three units of college preparatory mathematics.
123. Analytic Geometry and Calculus II. (5) Winter, Spring.
A study of additional topics in analytical geometry, definite and indefinite integrals, applications
of integration.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.
124. Analytic Geometry and Calculus III. (5) Spring.
A study of differentiation of trigonometric logarithmic, and exponential functions, methods of
integration, improper integrals, and polar coordinates.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 123.
152. Computer Programming I. (5) (On demand)
An introduction to computer programming.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.
153. Computer Programming II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Mathematics 152, with a study of problem formulation, computer simulation
and solutions of numerical and non-numerical problems.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 152.
200. Metric Mathematics. (2) (On demand)
A study of measurement using the metric system.
201. Business Mathematics. (2) (On demand)
A study of mathematics applications in business.
202. Techniques of Problem Solving. (2) (On demand)
A study of problem-solving methods.
260. Plane Trigonometry. (3) Winter.
A study of trigonometric functions, radian measure, identities, logarithmic functions, inverse func-
tions, graphs, and applications.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.
Mathematics/ 1 59
305. Theory of Numbers. (5) Winter, 1994.
An introduction to number theory.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.
306. College Geometry. (5) Spring, 1994.
An introduction to non-Euclidean geometry and an extension of the Euclidean system.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.
310. Methods of Teaching Mathematics. (5) Fall, 1993.
A study of methods of teaching secondary mathematics effectively.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 122 and 333 or permission of instructor.
314. Statistics. (5) Winter. *
A study of problems related to statistical procedures as applied to economics, education, the
social sciences, and the life sciences.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.
316. Probability and Statistics. (5) Spring, 1994.
An introduction to probability and statistical inference.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.
322. Analytic Geometry and Calculus IV. (5) Fall.
A study of indeterminate forms, vectors, solid analytic geometry, infinite series, and applications
to physics.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 24.
323. Calculus V. (5) Winter.
A study of partial derivatives, multiple integrals, and vector analysis. Topics include functions of
two or more variables; limits, continuity, and differentiability; directional derivatives and gra-
dients; tangent planes; maxima and minimal of functions of two variables; Lagrange multipliers;
double and triple integrals with geometric and physical applications; vector fields; line and surface
integrals; Green's Theorem.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 322.
324. Differential Equations. (5) Spring.
A study of first and second order differential equations with applications, numerical methods,
and solution in series.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 323.
333. Modern Algebra I. (5) Fall, 1994.
An introduction of modern abstract algebra.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 123.
334. Modern Algebra II. (5) Winter, 1995.
A continuation of Modern Algebra I.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 333.
335. Linear Algebra. (5) Spring.
An introduction to linear algebra and matrix theory.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 333 or permission of instructor.
1 60 / Mathematics
340. History of Mathematics. (5) Winter, 1 994.
An historical development of mathematical concepts.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 123 or permission of instructor.
342. Complex Variables. (5) Fall, 1994.
An introduction to complex variables.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 322.
343. Analysis I. (5) Spring, 1994.
An introduction to real analysis.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 322.
344. Analysis II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Analysis I.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 343.
350. Problem Solving I. (1)
A study of problem solving in the area of pre-calculus mathematics.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
351. Problem Solving II. (1)
A study of problem solving in the areas of calculus and analysis.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
352. Problem Solving III. (1).
A study of problem solving in the areas of abstract and linear algebras.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
356. Algebra for Elementary Teachers. (5) (On demand)
A study of special topics in algebra relevant to elementary school mathematics.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.
357. Geometry for Elementary Teachers. (5) (On demand)
A study of special topics in geometry relevant to elementary school mathematics.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.
359. Problem Solving in School Mathematics. (5) (On demand)
Skills and strategies for solving mathematical problems are developed.
360. Finite Mathematics. (5) Spring.
A study of finite mathematics with business applications.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 111 or 122.
Mathematics 1 161
380. Discrete Mathematics. (5) Spring, 1994.
An introduction to discrete mathematics. Topics include set theory, combinatorics, recurrence
relations, linear programming, and graph theory.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 122.
410. Numerical Methods. (5) (On demand)
An introduction to numerical analysis with computer solutions. Topics include Taylor series, finite
difference, calculus, roots of equations, solutions of linear systems of equations and least-squares.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 124 and Computer Science 199.
162/
Modern Foreign Languages
INTRODUCTION
Modern Foreign Languages are offered at LaGrange College in order to
assist students in dealing with and productively functioning within a world of
ever-decreasing size. The introductory courses provide a beginning opportu-
nity for the student to learn and use a language other than his/her own native
tongue and to provide an understanding of the richness and diversity of an-
other culture.
Students entering LaGrange College bringing with them two (2) years of
high school foreign language will be placed in an intermediate level course
of that language; or if the student chooses he or she may start the study of
another language at beginning level.
Minors are offered in French and Spanish. Upon the completion of the
minor, the student should have an appropriate understanding of the four basic
language skills of reading, writing, speaking, and understanding. Satisfactory
performance on the ACTFL oral proficiency test in French or Spanish is a
requirement for the certification of the minor.
Course Descriptions
French
101. Elementary French. (5) (On demand)
A course for beginners with intensive practice in pronunciation, essentials of grammar, and
reading of simple prose.
102. Elementary French. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of French 101.
103. Intermediate French. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of French 102 with additional readings.
110. Introduction to French Culture. (5)
A course designed to create intercultural understanding through the study of French history and
achievements in the arts and sciences and a consideration of modern life in France. This is a
contractual option for general education limited to the non-traditional student.
121. Introduction to French Civilization. (5) (On demand)
A study of the art, literature, history, and anthropology of France designed to increase reading
comprehension and speed.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. This course, French 103, or consent of instructor prereq-
uisite to all 300-level French courses.
Modern Foreign Languages 1 163
199. French Travel Seminar. (5) (On demand)
A travel-study seminar composed of preliminary academic study and cultural contact with French
history and contemporary French life through a program conducted in Paris, the Loire Valley,
Normandy, and the South region of France. Some knowledge of French desirable. Students with
proficiency in French must conduct their academic work in the language.
300. French Conversation and Composition. (5) (On demand)
A course stressing practice in speaking and writing French. Not open to students fluent in French.
301. Survey of French Literature I. (5) (On demand)
A study of major writings from the Middle Ages through the eighteenth century.
302. Survey of French Literature II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of French 301, covering the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. May be taken
before, or without, French 301.
311. Lectures Expliquees. (5) (On demand)
A study of selected materials from various genres reflecting the history and culture of France.
321. French Phonetics. (5) (On demand)
A study of French sounds with intensive drills in pronunciation. Not open to student fluent in
French.
German
101. Elementary German. (5) (On demand)
A course for beginners with intensive practice in pronunciation, essentials of grammar, and
reading of simple prose.
102. Elementary German. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of German 1 01 .
103. Intermediate German. (5) (On demand)
A review of grammar and syntax with practice in reading selected texts.
121. Introduction to German Civilization. (3) (On demand)
A reading course designed to improve the student's proficiency in German through a study of
history, literature, and culture.
This course, or consent of instructor, prerequisite to all 300-level courses.
300. German Conversation and Composition. (5) (On demand)
A course stressing practice in speaking and writing German. Not open to students fluent in
German.
1 64 / Modern Foreign Languages
301. Selected Readings in German Literature I. (5) (On demand)
A study of selected reading in German fiction, poetry, and drama.
302. Selected Readings in German Literature II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of German 301.
Spanish
101. Elementary Spanish. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A course for beginners with intensive practice in pronunciation, essentials of grammar, and
reading of simple prose.
102. Elementary Spanish. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Spanish 101.
103. Intermediate Spanish. (5) (On demand)
A review of grammar and syntax with practice in reading selected texts.
110. Introduction to Hispanic Countries and Cultures. (5)
A course designed to develop inter-cultural understanding through study of the customs, beliefs,
and historical perspectives of Hispanic countries of the western hemisphere. This is a contractual
option for general education only for the nontraditional student.
121. Introduction to Hispanic Civilization. (5) (On demand)
A study of the art, literature, history, and anthropology of the Spanish-speaking world.
Prerequisite: Spanish 101, 102, or consent of the instructor. This course, or Spanish 103, or
consent of the instructor prerequisite to all 300-level courses.
199. Mexican Travel Seminar. (5-10) (On demand)
A travel-study seminar in cooperation with Interact Travel Seminars in Mexico to provide valuable
educational experience through close contact with Mexican contemporary life and its ancient
civilizations following basic preparation in history and culture. A program centered in Mexico
City, Puebla, Cholula, and Taxco with Mexican and U.S. teaching staff. Some knowledge of
Spanish desirable.
300. Spanish Conversation and Composition. (5) (On demand)
A course stressing practice in speaking and writing Spanish. Not open to students fluent in Spanish.
301. Survey of Spanish Literature I. (5) (On demand)
A study of major writings from the Middle Ages through the seventeenth century.
302. Survey of Spanish Literature II. (5) (On demand)
A study of representative novels, plays, and poetry from the eighteenth century through the
present.
Modern Foreign Languages 1 1 65
311. Lecturas Explicadas. (5) (On demand)
A study of selected materials from various genres reflecting the history and culture of Latin
America.
321. Spanish Phonetics. (5) (On demand)
A study of Spanish sounds with intensive drills in pronunciation. Not open to students fluent in
Spanish.
Language*
101. Beginning Language I. (5) (On demand)
A course for beginners with intensive practice in oral communications, pronunciation, essentials
of grammar, and where possible, reading of simple prose.
102. Beginning Language II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Language 101.
Prerequisite: Language 101.
103. Intermediate Language. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of Language 102.
Prerequisite: Language 102.
110. Introduction to the Language Culture. (5) (On demand)
A course designed to create intercultural understanding through the study of the language history
and achievements in the arts and sciences and a consideration of modern life in the country.
This is a contractual option for general education limited to the non-traditional student. This
course is in English and has no prerequisites.
121. Introduction to the Language Civilization. (5) (On demand)
A study of art, literature, history, and anthropology.
, Prerequisite: Language 102.
199. Language Travel Seminar. (5) (On demand)
A travel-study seminar designed by the instructor.
Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
*Note: These courses are available so that a language other than French, German or Spanish
may be available from time-to-time. It is anticipated that in the 1993-94 school year Hebrew
and Japanese will be offered. Substitute the word "Hebrew" or "Japanese" where "language"
appears in the course title and course description.
166/
Music
A music minor is offered by the LaCrange College Music Department.
Note: a music major will be initiated in the fall of 1994. Please contact the
chair (812-7219) for a description of the program. It is designed to give the
student a very focused and fulfilling music curriculum. The program is set up
to allow the student to gain significant skill and exposure to music and to
music making.
Our newly instituted Beginning Class Piano series assures that all music
students will have functional keyboard and theory skills. This will allow the
student to progress more quickly and successfully in the 200 and 300 level
courses.
The music minor will also be able to specialize in one of four areas to
further enhance their musical opportunities. The first of these four areas is the
new curriculum of electronic music. This area of specialization will provide
significant training in the creative and productive use of music and music
technology. The other three areas that the music minor may specialize in
include piano, voice, and guitar performance.
The LaGrange College Singers and the LaCrange College Wind Ensemble
provide recurring performance and touring opportunities for LaGrange Col-
lege students. These ensembles are open to all LaGrange College students.
The curriculum for the music minor is as follows:
Music Theory - MUS 350, 351, 352 9 credits
Ensemble - MUS 240 or Mus 241 6 credits
Major instrument* piano, voice, guitar 6 credits
*MUS 370, and 371 may substitute for major instrument
Electives chosen from the following: 9 credits
250, 251, 252, 260, 265, 270, 305, 306, 307, 370, 371, 372, 373, 380.
Total 30 credits
Course Descriptions
100. Music Fundamentals. (1)
This course is designed to give a student with no prior musical experience, the necessary skills to
begin music study.
101. Beginning Class Piano I. (2)
Group instruction in fundamental piano skills. Emphasis on music reading and theory.
Prerequisite: MUS 100 or by placement audition.
102. Beginning Class Piano II. (2)
Continuation of MUS 101.
Prerequisite: MUS 101 or by placement.
103. Beginning Class Piano III. (2)
Prerequisite: MUS 102 or by placement.
Music/ 167
110. Beginning Class Voice. (2)
Croup instruction in vocal performance. Emphasis on basics of breathing, resonance, placement,
and song preparation.
Prerequisite: MUS 100 or by placement.
111. Beginning Class Guitar. (2)
Group instruction in guitar performance. Emphasis on the basics of reading, technique, tone
production and solo playing.
Prerequisite: MUS 100 or by placement.
112. Music Survey I. (5) Fall, Winter.
A survey of music from the Medieval period through the Classic period. A class.
114. Music Survey II. (5) Spring.
A survey of music from the Romantic period through the twentieth century. A class.
205. Intermediate Piano. (2)
Individual instruction in piano performance. Also includes a weekly piano seminar. May be
repeated for credit. Private lessons. Placement by audition.
206. Intermediate Voice. (2)
Individual instruction in vocal performance. Also includes a weekly voice seminar. May be re-
peated for credit. Private lessons. Placement by audition.
207. Intermediate Guitar. (2) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Individual instruction in guitar. May be repeated for credit. Private lessons. Placement by audition.
'240. Chorus. (1) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A performance organization designed to give training in choral performance. May be repeated
for credit.
241. Wind Ensemble. (1) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A performance organization designed for students with previous band experience. May be re-
peated for credit.
250. English Diction for Stage and Song. (2)
Intensive training in phonetics and voice production to improve diction for purpose of speaking
and singing. Scenes and songs will be extracted from American drama and musical theatre for
study. May be repeated for credit.
Prerequisite: Have been or are presently enrolled in MUS 110, 206, 306.
251. Diction I (Italian). (2)
Study of Italian language diction for the purpose of singing. Prior knowledge of a foreign language
is desirable.
Prerequisite: MUS 250.
168/ Music
252. Diction II (German). (2)
Study of German language diction for the purpose of singing. Prior knowledge of a foreign
language is desirable.
Prerequisite: MUS 250.
253. Diction III (French). (2)
Study of French language diction for the purpose of singing. Prior knowledge of a foreign language
is desirable.
Prerequisite: MUS 250.
260. Music for Children. (3)
Introduction to the techniques involved in individual and group instruction of children in the
private studio. Conventional and creative methods will be explored.
Prerequisite: MUS 103 or Piano Proficiency Exam.
265. Beginning Conducting. (2)
Conducting techniques, score reading, rehearsal techniques, and concert programming. May be
repeated for credit.
Prerequisite: MUS 103 or piano proficiency.
270. Introduction to Electronic Music. (3)
Basic studio techniques, studio software, music printing software, sequencing, synthesizers, and
sampling will be covered. No prior computer experience is required.
Prerequisite: MUS 103 or piano proficiency.
305. Advanced Piano. (2)
Individual instruction in piano performance. Also includes a weekly piano seminar. May be
repeated for credit. Private lessons. Placement by audition.
306. Advanced Voice. (2)
Individual instruction in vocal performance. Also includes a weekly voice seminar. May be re-
peated for credit.
307. Advanced Guitar. (2)
Individual instruction in guitar performance. Also includes a weekly seminar. May be repeated
for credit. Placement by audition.
350. Music Theory I. (3)
Common practice music theory beginning with fundamental theoretical skills: intervals, chords,
melodic and rhythmic dictation, cadences, and beginning concepts of SATB voice leading. Also
includes a required ear training lab.
Prerequisite: MUS 1 03 or piano proficiency.
351. Music Theory II. (3)
Four part writing, harmony, chord progressions, borrowed chords, four part dictation, and be-
ginning counterpoint. Also includes a required ear training lab.
Prerequisite: MUS 350.
Music 1 169
352. Music Theory III. (3)
Twentieth century theory to include studies in 12 tone techniques, serialism, minimalism, alea-
toric, and other current trends. Also includes a required ear training lab.
Prerequisite: MUS 351.
370. Electronic Music I. (3)
Creative work in the electronic domain with an emphasis on the avant garde. Musique concrete
and its application to sampling, analog and digital synthesis to include effects processing.
Prerequisite: MUS 270.
371. Electronic Music II. (3)
Continued creative work in the electronic domain with an emphasis on composite electronic
media i.e. sampling, synthesis, audio recording, and real time performance.
Prerequisite: MUS 370.
372. Media Music. (2)
10 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec formats, audio/video synchronization, soundtrack production, and film
scoring. Contemporary styles will be the emphasis of this course. A projects course.
Prerequisite: MUS 371.
373. Composition/Arranging. (2)
Private lessons in composition/arranging for standard performing ensembles. May be repeated
for credit.
Prerequisite: Have been or are presently enrolled in MUS 350, 351, 352.
380. Special Topics.
Private instruction for advanced students in topics not otherwise covered in the music catalog.
The subject matter of this course is dependent upon the approval of both the instructor and the
music department chairman.
170/
Nursing
The purpose of the LaGrange College Associate Degree program is to pre-
pare individuals for careers in nursing within a Christian, liberal arts setting.
The graduate nurse is prepared to function on a beginning level in a structured
health care setting as a provider and manager of patient care, patient teacher,
communicator, and member within the profession of nursing. The graduate
is eligible to become licensed as a registered nurse upon successful completion
of the National Council Licensing Examination (NCLEX-RN). Completion of
the Associate of Arts degree provides a foundation for further studies leading
to a higher degree in nursing or other areas.
Progression Requirements:
*1. Nursing courses are in sequence and a grade of C or higher must be
made in each nursing course in order to successfully complete the course and
continue the sequence (a C is defined as 75-79).
*2. A student who wishes to repeat a nursing course must first complete
an audit of the preceding nursing course. For successful completion of audit,
the student must adhere to the regular attendance policies excepting clinical
laboratory where attendance is not permitted.
*3. A student who fails to earn a C or higher more than once in any of
the clinical nursing courses is not permitted to continue in the nursing pro-
gram.
4. A grade of C or higher must be earned in each required biological science
course. A student who earns two final course grades of D or F in any required
biological science is not permitted to enter or to continue in the nursing
program.
5. A grade of C or higher must be earned in English 1 01 , 1 02, and 1 03 in
order to successfully complete the nursing program.
6. A student must successfully complete each biological science course by
the prescribed quarter in order to continue in the nursing sequence.
7. All general college non-nursing courses must be successfully completed
prior to the final quarter of the nursing program.
8/ In order to progress to the sophomore level, a nursing student must
have a 2.0 cumulative grade point average.
*1,2, and 3 under progression requirements also apply to a student who receives a WF (withdrawn
failing) in a nursing course.
Graduation Requirements:
1. All curriculum requirements must be successfully completed.
2. An exit exam which covers each of the five clinical areas (Medical,
Surgical, Psychiatric, Pediatric, and Maternity Nursing) will be administered
to sophomore students during Spring Quarter. Each student is required to
achieve a passing score in each of the five areas. Required passing scores are
Nursing I 171
specified each year by the nursing faculty. If all areas of the exit exam are
not passed, the student must attend scheduled review classes and re-take the
previously failed area exams. A student not passing the exit exams the second
time will not be graduated at that time and must complete additional nursing
studies specified by the nursing faculty. After completing the specified nursing
studies, the student will be required to retake and pass the exit exams before
being allowed to graduate.
Curriculum:
The seven quarter curriculum consists of 58 hours of nursing, 33 hours of
the general education curriculum, and 20 hours of general college courses.
The nursing program is offered on a sequential basis beginning each fall
quarter and progressing from the simple to the more complex aspects of
nursing. A sample course progression is as follows:
FRESHMAN
Fall
Mathematics 110*. ...5
Nursing 110** 6
Biology 148 5
Col 101 .2
18
Winter
Nursing 111
Biology 149
Psychology 149
Spring
..6 Nursing 112 8
..5 Biology 320 or
..5 Psychology 302 5
English 101 .3
16 16
Summer
Sociology 146 5
Bio 320/Psy 302 5
English 102 3
Computer
Science 163 2
15
SOPHOMORE
Fall Winter Spring
Nursing 214 12 Nursing 215 12 Nursing 216 12
English 103 3 Nursing 21 7 .2
15 12 14
Total hours: 106
Nursing: 58
General Education: 28
Non-Nursing 20
*A higher level mathematics course may be substituted, based on placement testing.
* Prior to entering Nursing 110, a student must present proof of current certification in basic
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). Certification must be maintained throughout subsequent nursing
courses.
1 72 / Nursing
110. Introduction to Nursing/Care of the Elderly. (4 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per
week) (6) Fall.
A course which includes basic concepts and skills necessary in providing patient care. Emphasis
upon basic nutrition, the aging process, and introduction to communication skills and mental
health concepts. Clinical emphasis upon the care of the aged.
Co- or prerequisites: Biology 148; Mathematics 110, 111, or 122.
111. Introduction to Medical-Surgical Nursing Care of the Adult. (4 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per
week) (6) Winter.
A course providing more advanced nursing concepts and skills. Emphasis upon basic pharma-
cology and the nursing process. Clinical focus upon the care of the less complex medical surgical
patient.
Prerequisite: Nursing 110. Co- or prerequisite: Biology 149.
112. Care of the Mother and Newborn. (6 hrs. lee, 6 hrs. lab per week) (8) Spring.
A course designed to correlate theoretical knowledge of the maternity cycle and growth and
development during the newborn period with clinical experiences in the care of these patients.
Course content includes comprehensive care of the family during the reproductive years and of
the newborn. Emphasis upon concepts, skills, and unique behavior patterns necessary to provide
individualized nursing care of maternity and infant patients as well as the nurses's role as a health
teacher.
Prerequisite: Nursing 111.
114. Nursing Concepts. (3) (Every other year)
A course for licensed practical nurses, designed as a transition course into the RN program. It
builds upon previous learning of the LPN, extending knowledge of basic nursing concepts. Em-
phasis is placed on integration of learning within the nursing process and on communication
theory. [Note: Successful completion of Nursing 114 exempts LPN students from Nursing 110
and Nursing 111.]
Prerequisite: MTH 110, BIO 148, COL 101; Co- or prerequisites: BIO 149, PSY 149.
214. Care of the Adult and Child I. (8 hrs. Iec v 12 hrs. lab per week) (12) Fall.
A sequence of instructional courses with planned clinical experiences in meeting the medical,
surgical, and psychological needs of adults and children. Concepts of pharmacology, nutrition,
patient education, growth and development and psychomotor skills are integrated throughout.
Prerequisite: Nursing 112.
215. Care of the Adult and Child II. (8 hrs. lee, 12 hrs. lab per week) (12) Winter.
A continuation of Nursing 214. Increasing knowledge and skills required for the care of the
hospitalized patient. Clinical emphasis is directed toward care of patients of all ages with muli-
system medical-surgical and/or psychosocial problems.
Prerequisite: Nursing 214.
216. Care of the Adult and Child III. (5 hrs. lee, 21 hrs. lab per week) (12) Spring.
A continuation of the study and care of hospitalized children and adults with multi-system prob-
lems. Emphasis upon self-direction, management of the care of groups of patients, and transition
to the graduate nurse role.
Prerequisite: Nursing 215.
217. Nursing Seminar. (2) Spring.
A study of issues and trends in nursing practice, with emphasis on the legal, ethical, and profes-
sional responsibilities of a registered nurse.
Prerequisite: Nursing 215. Corequisite: Nursing 216.
/ 173
Philosophy
No major program is offered in philosophy. Please see the section on
Religion.
149. Introduction to Philosophy. (5) (On demand)
A survey of the major fields of thought involving those principles which are basic in the making
of man's culture and history.
301. History of Philosophy I. (5) Fall, 1993.
A historical survey of Creek, Roman, and Medieval philosophy.
302. History of Philosophy II. (5) Winter, 1994.
A historical survey of the philosophies of the Renaissance, the Enlightenment, and modern times.
303. History of Philosophy III. (5) (On demand)
A study of some contemporary movements in philosophy.
366. Philosophy of Religion. (5) Spring, 1994.
An investigation of the persistent problems of mankind in philosophy and religion.
174/
Physics
INTRODUCTION
The physics curriculum at LaCrange College serves two basic purposes:
1) an introduction to the physical sciences, oriented towards developing
problem solving and reasoning skills suitable for the General Require-
ments of the college.
2) support courses for programs in Mathematics, Chemistry, Biology, Com-
puter Science, Dual-degree in Engineering, Pre-Medicine, Pharmacy
and Education.
Course Descriptions
101. Introductory Physics I. (4 hrs., lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.
A noncalculus-based introduction to elementary kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum,
fluids, and mechanical waves.
Prerequisite: MTH 111.
102. Introductory Physics II. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.
A continuation of 101 and is an introduction to electric charge, Coulomb's Law, electric and
magnetic fields, and thermodynamics. Lab introduces the student to electronics.
Prerequisite: PHY 1 01 .
103. Introductory Physics III. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) Spring.
A continuation of Physics 102, providing an introduction to geometric and wave optics, special
relativity and quantum physics.
Prerequisite: PHY 102.
121. General Physics I. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Fall.
A calculus-based introduction to particle dynamics, energy and momentum conservation, and
rotational dynamics, and hydrostatics.
Prerequisite: MTH 123.
122. General Physics II. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.
A continuation of Physics 121 covering electricity and magnetism, heat and thermodynamics,
and simple circuits. Lab introduces the students to electronics.
Prerequisites: PHY 121, MTH 124.
123. General Physics III. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) Spring.
A continuation of Physics 122, providing an introduction to geometric and wave optics, special
relativity and quantum physics.
Prerequisite: PHY 122.
210. Modern Electronics Lab I. (2)
A "hands-on" approach to electronics designed to provide experience of use to students in the
sciences. Topics include diodes, transistors, and basic applications of these circuit elements.
Prerequisites: PHY 102 or PHY 122.
IMS
Political Science
Introduction
The political science program offers liberal arts students an opportunity to
develop their capacity to analyze and interpret the significance of political
events and governmental processes. Students majoring in political science are
prepared for careers in fields such as law, business, public administration,
teaching, criminal justice, and journalism.
Objectives
Students majoring in political science at LaCrange College will acquire basic
knowledge of these areas:
1. The values, processes, and institutions that affect collective decision-
making and contemporary politics in the United States.
2. The comparative analysis of the values, processes, and institutions that
affect collective decision-making and contemporary politics in the
United States and other countries.
3. The relations between and among states, especially those affect inter-
national conflict and international cooperation.
4. The ethical dimensions of public policy issues, political practices, and
constitutional and legal questions.
Students majoring in political science at LaGrange College also will acquire
the basic skills necessary to comprehend and perform modern political anal-
ysis. These include:
1 . Ability to analyze the foundations of and differences between normative
and empirical inquiry.
2. Knowledge of the basic elements of research design and methods in
normative, empirical, and historical studies of politics.
3. Knowledge of basic data management and analysis and of the use of
computers in political research.
4. Ability to convey findings in both written and oral presentations.
Course of Study
The program in political science offers both a major and minor course of
study in political science. The program's major requires a mix of both general
education and department courses. Those planning to pursue a major in
political science are encouraged to declare so by the beginning of the second
quarter of their sophomore year.
1 76 / Political Science
For a Major in Political Science:
1. Demand Sequence from the General Education Curriculum
Political Science 101 United States Government
Economics 101 Contemporary Economic Issues
Those intending to major in political science must complete Political Science
101 before attempting any courses in the program demand sequence. Poten-
tial majors are encouraged to select a second history sequence beyond general
requirements (either History 1 01 and 1 02 or History 1 1 1 and 1 1 2), Economics
201 and 203, Psychology 149, and Sociology 146 to fulfill their general ed-
ucation requirements.
Total demand hours: 30
2. Demand Sequence from the Program in Political Science
Political Science 301 Research Methods in Political Science
Political Science 210 Comparative Politics
Political Science 220 International Politics
Political Science 451 Selected Topics in Political Science
Majors must also complete an additional thirty (30) hours of elective courses
chosen from the two, three, and four hundred level courses listed for the
program in this catalog.
Total demand hours: 50
For a Minor in Political Science
A minor in political science may be earned by taking thirty (30) hours of
elective courses approved by the program faculty. Students minoring in po-
litical science must take Political Science 101. At least fifteen (15) hours of
the elective courses must be in 300-level courses.
Assessment of Objectives
Assessment of the objectives of the program in political science is based
on successful completion of each major course with a grade of C or better
and successful completion of Political Science 451 : Selected Topics in Political
Science. Political Science 451 includes completion of a major research project
and presentation of the resulting paper to interested faculty and students. To
enroll in Political Science 451, students must have completed Political Science
101, 210, 220, 301 and an additional fifteen (15) hours of elective courses
in the program demand sequence or have received the permission of program
faculty and the chairman of the department.
Political Science/ 1 77
Special Opportunities
The program in political science supervises a variety of internships in local,
state, and national government. Students interested in pursuing one of these
opportunities should consult with the program faculty.
Students wishing to combine studies of political science and criminal justice
may easily pursue a minor course of study in criminal justice. The faculty of
the two programs should be consulted to insure that requirements for both
will be met.
Course Offerings
101. United States Government. (5)
An introductory course on the U.S. political system through an analysis of historical and contem-
porary issues and events. The course focus is on governmental institutions and public policy.
200. Introduction to Political Science. (5)
An introductory course which focuses on the nature of the discipline of political science and
which deals with the ways political scientists study politics through an overview of the major
topics of the discipline.
210. Comparative Politics. (5)
An examination of the processes and forms of government and politics from a comparative
perspective.
220. International Politics. (5)
A survey of the discipline of international relations focusing on the functions and processes of
inter-state relations.
301. Research Methods in Political Science.
A study of basic social science research methods as applied in political science. Topics considered
include: research design and data collection; measurement and causality; fitting models to data
with various methods; graphic analysis; and the use of statistical software.
302. Social Change. (5)
An examination of the processes determining social change. (See also Sociology 302.)
308. American Diplomatic History. (5)
An emphasis upon the procedure for developing foreign policy as well as diplomatic history. (See
also History 308.)
309. Public Administration. (5)
An introduction to public administration in the United States. (See also Sociology 309.)
310. Constitutional History of the United States to the Present. (5)
An analysis of fundamental constitutional development from 1 776 to the present. (See also History
310.)
Prerequisite: History 111-112.
1 78 / Political Science
320. States and Politics in Sub-Saharan Africa. (5)
A comparative study of the political systems of Sub-Saharan African countries. Topics considered
include: basic comparative theory; modern history of Sub-Saharan Africa; political systems of
selected states; and the interaction of political and economic factors in the region.
Prerequisite: PSC 304 or consent of instructor.
325. International Economics. (5)
A study of the different theories of international trade and evaluation of the effects of regional
economic integration and restrictions to world trade. An examination of the mechanisms of
international payments, the foreign exchange markets and balance of payments adjustments
under different exchange rate systems.
Prerequisite: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.
330. American Judicial Institutions. (5)
A study of the judicial institutions of the United States. Topics considered include: the structure
and powers of national and state courts, judicial procedure, judicial politics, court administration,
and policy formation by judicial institutions.
Prerequisite: PSC 101, or consent of instructor.
332. Public Finance. (5)
Analysis of the impact of governmental expenditures, taxation and credit upon production and
the distribution of income. Examination of the structures of the federal, state and local tax systems.
Prerequisites: ECO 201, 203, or consent of instructor.
340. Themes in Political Philosophy. (5)
An introduction to the basic ideas of political philosophy. Topics considered include: the social
and historical context of political theory; the development of major ideas in political philosophy;
critical analysis of important works; and the relation of political theory to contemporary politics.
342. Government and Business. (5)
A study of the interrelationships between the public and private sectors the relationship
between government and business, between government and labor, and government and agri-
culture. An examination of the reasons for, and the development of legislation, and case law
relating to the relationship between the public and private sectors. A study of the rise of admin-
istrative law, and the regulatory agencies.
Prerequisites: ECO 201 , 203, or consent of instructor.
350. State and Local Government. (5)
An analysis of the partners in federalism with emphasis on Georgia state and local governments,
as well as the Georgia Constitution.
378. European Diplomatic History: 1890 to the Present. (5)
A detailed examination of European international relations from the end of the Bismarckian
political system to the present. (See also History 378.)
Political 506006/179
400. Political Science Internship. (5-15)
Available to selected students to provide an opportunity to work in a governmental agency or
setting.
451. Selected Topics in Political Science. (5) Annually
A seminar course on a major subject of national or international concern based on individual
research and assigned readings.
180/
Psychology
INTRODUCTION
The goal of this department is to acquaint the student with basic principles
of behavior and the research methods necessary to understand them.
OBJECTIVES
A student who graduates from LaGrange College with a major in psychology
will:
1 . recognize the importance of an EMPIRICAL approach in attempting to
understand behavior.
2. be familiar with the concepts, terms, and explanatory principles char-
acteristic of the following theorists: Freud, Rogers, Maslow, Bandura,
Allport, Erikson, Piaget, Thorndike, Pavlov, Guthrie, Watson, Hull, Tol-
man, Skinner, and Kohlberg.
3. be able to evaluate CRITICALLY, through application of the principles
of logico-empirical science, the various theorists listed above.
4. be able to identify and discuss examples of the major "types" of learn-
ing, to wit: classical, operant, observational, information processing.
5. be familiar with generalizations regarding physiological correlates of
behavior.
6. be familiar with the major historical developments in psychology.
7. be familiar with the terminology of the current edition of the Diagnostic
and Statistical Manual of the American Psychiatric Association (DSM-
lll-R, 1987).
8. be familiar with the different theoretical approaches (including the psy-
choanalytic, the humanistic, and social learning-behavioral) in the de-
scription, etiology, and therapy of behavioral disorders listed in DSM-
lll-R.
9. be able to list and discuss the various objective and projective person-
ality assessment techniques including the Rorschach and Holtzman ink-
blots, the Thematic Apperception Test, the MMPI, the Q-sort, the 16-
PF, behavioral interviews, behavioral sampling, behavior survey sched-
ules, the Taylor Manifest Anxiety Scale, The Manifest Hostility Scale,
and the Buss-Durkee Hostility Inventory.
10. recognize the basic philosophical (e.g., What is personality?) and meth-
odological issues in psychological research.
11. be familiar with the sections of an APA style research report including
the kinds of information typically found in each.
Psychology/ 181
12. be familiar with the standard procedures for summarizing data, includ-
ing the construction of frequency tables, the calculation of measures of
central tendency (means, medians, and modes), calculation of meas-
ures of dispersion (range, variance, and standard deviation), and cor-
relation coefficients.
13. be familiar with the logic of hypothesis testing including the statement
of research and statistical hypothesis, the notion of Type I and Type II
errors, the power and efficiency of a statistical test, and the major
inferential techniques used in psychology (especially t tests, analysis of
variance, and chi-square).
14. recognize the concepts and principles of psychology as exemplified in
everyday situations.
A major in psychology consists of 60 quarter hours (12 courses) beyond
the introductory course (PSY 149). Forty of these hours come from the cate-
gories below.
Methods (Both Required See Note 1 Below)
PSY 298, PSY 299
Experimental Content (Select Two)
PSY 455, PSY 465, PSY 470
Social/Personality/Developmental Content (Select Three See Note 2 Be-
low)
PSY 321, (PSY 302 or PSY 358), PSY 350, PSY 460
Advanced Special Topics (Required See Note 3 Below)
PSY 480
Notes:
1. Since this department views psychology as a research based discipline,
it is strongly recommended that the student complete PSY 298 and
PSY 299 as soon as possible after the major is declared.
2. Students may take either PSY 302 or PSY 358 but not both to satisfy
this requirement. If a student takes both, one course counts toward the
20 hours of major electives.
3. PSY 480 will be offered once per year and will involve advanced study
of a specialized topic. Topics will vary from year to year.
4. PSY 149, Introduction to Psychology, is the prerequisite to all 200 level
and above psychology courses. Some courses have other prerequisites.
Major Electives
An additional 20 hours of major courses will be selected by the student.
A student may select any 300 or 400 level psychology course beyond those
counted in the required areas. Up to three courses selected from SOC 147,
SOC 300, SOC 308, & BIO 148 may be applied toward the major with the
approval of the advisor.
1 82 / Psychology
Assessment
The accomplishment of the psychology objectives will be demonstrated by
obtaining an acceptable score on a test administered by the department.
Normally, this test will be given during the student's final quarter at LaGrange
College.
Career Options
Students who complete the major in psychology have many career options.
Psychology is a very broad field which overlaps many different areas. Some
of the jobs taken by recent psychology graduates include management and
supervisory positions in business and industry and positions in community and
state service agencies. A psychology major also serves as good preparation for
advanced study in law, social service, counseling, and psychology.
Miscellaneous
No course with a grade below C may be applied toward a psychology
major.
It is strongly recommended that a psychology major complete the Biology
101-102 sequence to satisfy the science portion of the general requirements.
A maximum of 10 hours of special topics courses may be applied to the
Psychology Major.
Course Descriptions
149. Introduction to Psychology. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A survey of major topics in psychology including basic neuroanatomy, motivation, learning, per-
ception, personality and abnormal behavior.
Prerequisite to all 200- 300- and 400-level psychology courses.
298. Behavioral Statistics. (5) Fall.
Introduction to the measurement of behavior and quantitative methods of data analysis. An
emphasis on parametric statistics and their application to the behavioral sciences. The course also
includes an introduction to the APA style of Scientific Writing.
299. Research Methods. (4 hrs. lee, 2 hrs. lab per week) (5) Winter.
A survey of various types of research design, including the strengths and weaknesses of each. The
laboratory includes practice in designing and conducting experiments, as well as analysis and
reporting of results.
Prerequisite: Psychology 298 or consent of professor.
302. Human Growth and Development. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A study of normal life beginning with conception. Important development phenomena are con-
sidered in the light of several major developmental theories.
Psychology/ 183
304. Educational Psychology. (5) Fall, Spring.
Application of psychological principles and research to the teaching/learning process. Major topics
include behavioral and cognitive approaches to learning, classroom management, and test con-
struction and interpretation.
321. Social Psychology. (5) Fall.
A course dealing with behavior as affected by social influences. Major topics include social
perception, social communication (verbal and nonverbal), alturism, attitudes, aggression, and
prejudice. Also, applied areas such as forensic psychology are considered.
330. History and Systems of Psychology. (5) (On demand)
A study of the historical background of psychology, with emphasis upon the major schools of
thought.
341. Human Sexuality. (5) (On demand)
A research based study of the important issues in human relationships and sexuality.
350. Abnormal Psychology. (5) Fall, Spring.
A survey of the causes, characteristics, and current theories and treatments of deviant behavior.
351. Introduction to Counseling. (5) Winter.
An introduction to counseling approaches, methods, and assessment techniques. Emphasis is
placed on individual counseling.
Prerequisite: PSY 298 or consent of professor.
356. Microcomputer Applications in the Behavioral Sciences. (5) (On demand)
A study of the use of microcomputers with special emphasis on specific software programs
including data-base management, spread-sheets, word-processing, and statistical packages for the
behavioral scientist.
357. Psychology of Religion. (5) (On demand)
Psychological interpretation of religious experience and growth.
358. Psychology of Aging. (5) Winter.
Human aging is examined from physiological (e.g., sensory and cardiovascular changes), psycho-
logical (e.g., memory and intellectual changes), and sociological (e.g., adjusting to retirement)
perspectives. Also, death and disorders associated with aging such as Alzheimer's Disease are
explored.
380. Special Topics in Psychology. (On demand)
A course offered at the sophomore/junior level focusing on a specialized topic from the field of
psychology.
455. Cognitive Psychology. (5) (On demand)
An information processing analysis of topics in perception, thinking, learning, and memory.
1 84 / Psychology
460. Psychology of Personality. (5) Winter.
A critical study of major personality theories, principles and instruments of assessments, and
relevant empirical research.
Prerequisites: PSY 298 and PSY 299 or consent of professor.
465. Physiological Psychology. (5) (On demand)
A study dealing with the interactions of various structures of the body (primarily the neural and
endocrine systems) affecting behavior.
470. Theories of Learning. (5) Spring.
Historical survey of the theories of Thorndike, Pavlov, Skinner, Hull, Guthrie, Tolman, and Ban-
dura.
Prerequisites: PSY 298 and PSY 299 or consent of professor.
480. Special Topics in Psychology. (On demand)
A course offered at the junior/senior level focusing on a specialized topic from the field of
psychology. A prerequisite may be required.
/ 185
Religion
Courses in religion have a twofold purpose: to afford students the oppor-
tunity to study and investigate the role of religion in human experience; and
to provide, for those interested, a basis for further study and for selection of
positions in church-related vocations. The Department is aware of the in-
creasing demand that pre-theological students be prepared to enter seminary
at the graduate level in their studies and at the same time have a broad cultural
orientation. In addition, thm Department is aware of the need for an inter-
disciplinary preparation for persons interested in Christian Education. To this
end the Department offers a major in Christian Education which allows for
three concentrations: Director of Christian Education; Youth Ministry; Out-
door Ministries.
Students who desire to substitute Religion 103 and. 104 for the Religion
101 in the general education curriculum may do so. They should consult with
the chairman of the Department of Religion.
CHRISTIAN EDUCATION
Students earning a degree in Christian Education are expected to under-
stand the principles of Christian Education including objectives and teaching
methods related to their particular concentration, Christian personality de-
velopment, and to have a biblical and historical foundation in the Christian
faith.
A major in Christian Education consists of the following courses for a con-
centration:
1 . Director of Christian Education: Religion 1 50 or 341 , 320 or 321 , 330,
331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 350, 303 or 304 or 305, 313 or 314, 490
and 491. Prerequisite to the above courses in REL. 101 or REL. 103/
104. In addition, selected courses from other departments may be
recommended. Candidates completing the Bachelor of Arts degree with
this concentration will have fulfilled two of the four certification studies
for the Associate in Christian Education in the United Methodist Church.
2. Youth Ministry: Religion 330, 332, 350, 323 (required of all Method-
ists), 320 or 321 (non-Methodists), 303 or 304 or 305, 313 or 314,
490, and 491; HPE 152, 153, 313; PEd. 106, 158, 162; Psychology
306. Recommended: Psychology 341; Sociology 306; Education 449.
3. Out-door Ministries: Religion 303 or 304 or 305, 313 or 314, 330,
336, 490, and 491 ; Biology 336; Psychology 321 ; HPE 1 52, 1 53, 313,
330; PED. in addition to the three Gen. Req. P.E. courses, five other
activity courses from the following - 103, 106, 111, 114, 157, 158,
159, 162. Recommended: BIO. 334, 335; PSY. 306, 358. In meeting
General Requirements the following courses should be taken: BIO.
102; SPC. 105; REL. 110; PSY. 149.
1 86 / Religion
RELIGION
Students earning a degree in Religion are expected to have mastered basic
historical data pertaining to the Old Testament, the New Testament, and the
Church; to be familiar with basic issues in contemporary Christian thought;
to understand the fundamental issues in a mature religion including its de-
velopment through the educational program and its missional propagation.
A major in Religion consists of the following courses: REL. 304, 303 or
305, 313, 314, 320, 321, 329, 330, 341 or 150, 350, and a minimum of
two other five hour courses in the Department. Prerequisite to the above
courses is REL. 101 or REL. 103/104. In addition, a minimum of 20 hours
should be taken in other disciplines as approved by the Department Head
and/or Advisor.
Beginning with the class of 1990 all persons graduating from the Depart-
ment of Religion and Philosophy will be expected to complete satisfactorily
an oral and a written examination. This examination will be taken in the first
or second quarter of the Senior year. Completion is necessary before a student
can participate in an Internship.
101. Judaic-Christian Heritage. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A study of the major thought patterns which have emerged from the Judaic-Christian tradition
and of their impact on the institutions of Western Society.
102. Christian Ethics. (5) (On demand)
A study of ethical issues from the Christian perspective.
103. Old Testament Survey. (5) (On demand)
A survey of the history and literature of the ancient Hebrew people. Should be taken before
Religion 104.
104. New Testament Survey. (5) On demand)
Introduction to the New Testament through an examination of its historical setting and content,
and the significant contributions it has made.
110. Religious Dimensions of Human Behavior. (5) (On demand)
A study of the religious element in human experiences with a special emphasis on Christian faith
and life.
150. Introduction to the Archaeology of Palestine. (5) Spring 1995.
A study of the method and results of archaeology study in Palestine and related areas.
199. Summer Study-Travel Seminar. (5 or 10) (On demand)
Section A Biblical Studies: a study of archaeology, biblical history, biblical literature, and
modern Israeli culture, to be conducted in conjunction with a work program on a kibbutz in
Israel.
Section B Church History: a study of church history, to be combined with a three-week visit
to European centers related to that history.
Section C Missions: participation in the program of an established Mission which will incor-
porate work on Station and lectures pertaining to the work of that specific area.
Religion/ 187
237. Religion and American Life: Its Way in Worship. (2) Quarterly
The practicum is designed to enable students to explore theological reflection on actual worship
experiences. The order and elements of worship will be analyzed for their effectiveness as teaching
tools and as corporate acts of worship.
303. Torah (Law). (5) Fall, 1993.
A detailed study of the first five books of the Old Testament.
304. Neviim (Prophets). (5) Winter, 1994.
A detailed study of prophetic movements in Israel and of the individual prophets, their historical
background, lives, messages, and contributions to the religious life of Israel.
305. Ketuvin (Writings). (5) Spring, 1994.
An examination of Wisdom, Apocalyptic and poetic literature of the Old Testament.
310. Introduction to Biblical Greek I. (5) (On demand)
A beginning course designed to teach the fundamentals of Biblical Creek.
311. Introduction to Biblical Greek II. (5) (On demand)
A continuation of REL 301.
313. Life and Teachings of Jesus. (5) Fall, 1994.
A study of the message of Jesus within the context of the synoptic gospels and its application to
contemporary society.
314. Apostolic Age. (5) Fall, 1993.
An examination of the origin and expansion of the early Christian church, with studies in the
Epistles and the Acts of the Apostles.
320. Church History I. (5) Winter, 1994.
A survey of the history of the Christian Church from the close of the Apostolic Age to the end of
the Middle Ages.
321. Church History II. (5) Spring, 1994.
A history of the Christian Church from the close of the Apostolic Age to the end of the Middle
Ages.
323. Methodism. (5) Winter, 1995.
A survey of the history and thought of Methodism.
329. Contemporary Christian Thought. (5) Spring 1995.
A survey of the development of Christian thought, with particular attention to the nineteenth and
twentieth centuries.
330. Introduction to Christian Education. (5) Fall, 1994.
An examination of goals, methods, and techniques used in the church-school educational pro-
gram.
188/ Religion
331. Methods in Christian Education I (Children). (2) Fall, 1994.
A study and application of methods in Christian Education for children.
332. Methods of Christian Education II. (2) Winter, 1995.
A study and application of methods in Christian Education for youth.
333. Methods of Christian Education III. (2) Winter, 1995.
A study and application of the methods in Christian Education for adults.
334. Worship in the Church. (2) Fall, 1993.
A brief examination of worship in the church as an historical and a contemporary experience.
335. Curriculum in Christian Education. (2) Winter, 1994.
A study of the various curricula used in the educational programs of the church.
336. Out-door Ministry. (5) (On demand)
An examination of the goals and methods utilized in the various ministries out-of-doors.
338. Church Music. (5) Fall. (On demand)
A study of the history and types of Church Music and its use in the church.
341. Introduction to Mission. (5) (On demand)
A study of philosophy and program of Mission in the Church.
350. Psychology of Religion. (5) Winter, 1995.
Psychological interpretation of religious experience and growth.
360. World Religions. (5) (On demand)
A study of the literature and teachings of the great living religions and a comparison of the non-
Christian faiths with Christianity.
490. Seminar. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A study of issues confronting those participating in a local church setting. Required of all students
in the Internship.
491. Internship. (10) Fall, Winter, Spring.
Supervised participation in the local church setting.
/189
Sociology/Social Work
The primary objective of the social work program is to provide students
with knowledge and skills necessary for employment in social service agencies
as well as preparation for graduate education. The curriculum is designed to
increase the student's awareness of the structure and functioning of society
and the individual's role in our changing world. In addition to theoretical
knowledge, the student is given the opportunity for practical application of
his education working under supervision in a variety of community- based
social agencies.
Students completing majors in social work will have a fundamental knowl-
edge of the role of social work in dealing with behavioral problems and will
have demonstrated the ability to apply this knowledge in a practical work
experience setting.
A concentration in Criminal Justice within the B.A. Social Work program
may be obtained. In addition to social work skills, students electing this option
will have demonstrated a basic theoretical and practical understanding of the
criminal justice system.
Course Requirements for the Major in Social Work are:
Sociology 146, 147, 153, 300, 301, 490A and 490B 40 hours
Psychology 149, 302, 321, and 350 20 hours
Mathematics 314, Mathematics 316, or Psychology 298 5 hours
Five additional hours in Sociology or Criminal Justice to be chosen
by the student in consultation with the adviser .5 hours
Total 70 hours
Students electing the Criminal Justice concentration must satisfy all social
work requirements plus forty hours in Criminal Justice. For course descriptions
ip Criminal Justice, see that section of this Bulletin.
The accomplishment of the Social Work major objectives will be demon-
strated by the following:
1. Satisfaction of all course requirements including supervised practicum.
2. (A) A score of 75% or better on the State of Georgia Merit System Exam
in one of the following areas:
1 . Senior Caseworker
2. Behavior Technician
3. Court Service Worker
4. Probation/Parole Officer
OR
(B) An interview with an examination by a panel of Social Work/Crim-
inal Justice administrators.
1 90 / Sociology/Social Work
Students who complete the Social Work Major have career options that
include the following:
1 . Social Services
2. Mental Health Services
3. Youth Services
4. Correction Services
The Criminal Justice concentration opens career option in Law Enforce-
ment and Probation/Parole.
Course Descriptions
146. Introduction to Sociology. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
An introduction to the scientific study of the structure and dynamics of human society. A pre-
requisite to all 300-level sociology courses.
147. The Family. (5) Fall, Winter, Spring.
An analysis of contemporary marriage and family experiences.
148. Introduction to Anthropology. (5) Fall, Winter.
A general introduction to physical and cultural anthropology.
153. Social Problems. (5) Winter.
A study of selected social problems in American society which are related to deviant behavior,
value conflict, or social disorganization.
300. Introduction to Social Welfare and Social Work. (5) Fall.
A history of social welfare policy development and the role of social work in the United States.
Emphasis upon casework, group work, and community organization as practiced in social work
settings.
301. Social Theory. (5) Fall.
An analysis of the development, convergence and utilization of sociological theories.
302. Social Change. (5) (On demand)
An examination of the processes determining social change.
305. Sociology of Religion. (5) (On demand)
A sociological analysis of the interplay between religion and culture.
306. Juvenile Delinquency. (5) Winter.
An analysis of the nature and causes of juvenile delinquency and an evaluation of treatment or
preventive programs in this area of behavior.
307. Criminology. (5) Spring.
A study of criminal behavior and its treatment. An overview of treatment of the offender by
means of imprisonment, probation, and parole.
Sociology/Social Work/ 191
308. Cultural and Social Anthropology. (5) Spring.
A study of comparative cultures and social structures with special emphasis upon the ethnography
of primitive people.
309. Public Administration. (5) (On demand)
An introduction to public administration in the United States.
311. Introduction to Outdoor Therapy Methods I. (3) Winter.
To provide a solid foundation in the area of outdoor therapy, including theory and practice.
Course will require off-campus trips lasting from one day to a full weekend.
312. Introduction to Outdoor Therapy Methods II. (3) Spring.
A continuation of SOC. 31 1 .
Prerequisite: SOC. 311.
490A. Seminar in Social Work Methods. (5) Winter, Spring.
Individual and group study of methods of social work practice-casework, group work and com-
munity organization. To be taken concurrently with 490B.
490B. Field Placement in a Social Service Setting. (10) Winter, Spring.
Directed observation and participation in social service/criminal justice practice. To be taken
concurrently with 490A.
192/
Speech
INTRODUCTION
Communicating effectively in the oral tradition is a hallmark of a well-
educated person. Many courses at LaGrange College emphasize the devel-
opment of this skill. There is one course required of all students that begins
this process.
Course Description
105. Speech Fundamentals. (3) Fall, Winter, Spring.
A course emphasizing development of organizational and delivery skills through individual speak-
ing exercises in a variety of formats including informative, demonstrative and persuasive.
/ 193
Theater Arts
INTRODUCTION
The primary goal of the Department of Theater Arts is to provide its students
with the knowledge and skills necessary for employment within the enter-
tainment industry, specifically theater. The training program emphasizes the
practical aspects of theater and the importance of process. It is the belief of
the faculty that the training process must simulate the "real world" of theater.
With the belief that theater is both an art form and a business, the curriculum
provides a strong undergraduate foundation in theater performance, design/
production, and literature/history. Classroom instruction is enhanced through
practical experiences in the form of fully staged productions each quarter.
Students may also participate in the departments Summer Repertory Com-
pany, an intensive program in acting, technical theater, stage management,
and other production areas.
Offering a B.A. in Theater Arts, majors are required to complete a 52 hour
flexible core curriculum designed to allow students to create a generalist,
performance, or design/production emphasis. In addition, 20 hours of elec-
tees are required in theater or a collateral area (music, art, dance) approved
by the departmental chair resulting in a total of 72 quarter hours.
OBJECTIVES
The following objectives are established as a basis for the training program
in Theater Arts. Upon application for graduation, the Theater Arts major will
be expected to:
1) have an understanding of the basic theoretical and evolutionary con-
cepts behind each of the three major divisions within the discipline:
performance, design/production, and literature/history.
2) have an artistic vocabulary especially in their specific area of concen-
tration.
3) have the technical knowledge pertaining to the student's chosen area
of concentration, but not limited to it.
4) demonstrate an understanding of auditioning (actors) and or portfolio
presentation (designers/technicians) through a juried presentation.
5) be knowledgeable of various unions within the entertainment industry,
including but not limited to, Actors Equity association (AEA), United
Scenic Artists (USA), and the Screen Actors Guild (SAG).
6) be knowledgeable of viable avenues of employment and sources noting
such information.
7) have an understanding of graduate study and opportunities in theater
and the performing arts.
1 94 / Theater Arts
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE
THEATER ARTS MAJOR
A student graduating with a major in Theater Arts must meet all of the
following criteria:
a. Satisfactory completion of all degree requirements as outlined in the
catalogue.
b. A minimum score of 70% on the Departmental Assessment Test, to be
administered prior to a student filing a petition to graduate. This D.A.T.
may be repeated as necessary.
c. Regular participation in all departmental production activities, including
auditions, set and costume construction, production crews and pro-
duction strikes.*
d. Attend all scheduled departmental meetings and activities.*
'Student progress towards the above requirements will be evaluated by the faculty each spring following
the students juried presentation. Recommendations will be forwarded to the student.
ADMISSION TO THEATER ARTS MAJOR
In order to be admitted as a Theater Arts major, a student must meet the
following criteria:
A. Have an overall GPA of 2.25 or better
B. Writing proficiency a grade of C or better in English 101, 102 and
103
C. Oral or Theatrical Proficiency a grade of C or better in either SPC
105 orTHA 110
D. Past Participation in Dept. production recommendation of super-
vising theater faculty member; transfer students: provide recommen-
dation from previous theater professor
E. Prognosis for Success: an evaluation during SPC 105 or THA 110 per-
tinent to:
1) attendance
2) attitude
3) cooperation
4) oral and written skills
5) enthusiasm and dedication to theater
A student that has not met all of the above criteria may be admitted
provisionally. The student admitted provisionally has three quarters in which
to meet all criteria.
Theater Arts 1 195
REQUIREMENTS FOR MAJOR:
A total of 72 quarter hours are required for the Theater Arts major.
Core Requirements (37 hrs):
THA 101 Drama Survey I 5 hrs.
or
THA 102 Drama Survey II 5 hrs.
THA 1 1 Essentials of Theater 5 hrs.
THA 180 Stagecraft/Lighting 5 hrs.
THA 184 Acting I 5 hrs.
THA 1 90 Theater History 5 hrs.
THA 286 Makeup for the Stage 5 hrs.
THA 330 Analysis of Drama 5 hrs.
THA 370 Fundamentals of Directing 5 hrs.
Core Option Three of the following (15 hrs):
THA 451 Auditioning 5 hrs.
THA 351 Advanced Acting 5 hrs.
THA 360 Principles of Theatrical Design 5 hrs.
THA 381 Scenic and Lighting Design 5 hrs.
THA 420 Theater Management 5 hrs.
Electives Electives may be earned in theater or a collateral area
(music, art, and/or dance) and must be approved by the
Departmental Chair.* 20 hrs.
Total 72 hrs.
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE THEATER ARTS MINOR
THA 110 Essentials of Theater
THA 180 Stagecraft/Lighting
THA 184 Acting I
THA 190 Theater History
Theater Electives*
Total 30 hrs.
*A maximum of 10 hours of summer theater may be applied to the major or minor elective requirement. Any
remaining hours may be applied to the general graduation elective. A maximum of 10 hours maybe applied
to the major requirement from a collateral area.
Course Descriptions
101. Drama Survey I. (5)
A survey of Western theater from its beginning in Hellenistic Greece to the rise of Realism.
Selected plays will be read and discussed in terms of their theatrical importance and their inter-
action with the societies in which they were written.
5 hrs.
5 hrs.
5 hrs.
5 hrs.
10 hrs.
1 96 / Theater Arts
102. Drama Survey II. (5)
A survey of Western theater from the rise of Realism through contemporary drama. Selected
plays will be read and discussed in terms of their theatrical importance and their interaction with
the societies in which they were written.
Drama Survey II may be taken independently of Drama Survey I.
1 1 0. Essentials of the Theater. (5)
A course designed to introduce the student to the various aspects of the theater. Topics include
acting, directing, design, production, and dramatic structure.
180. Stagecraft/Lighting. (5)
A course designed to acquaint the student with the theories and techniques of stage scenery,
properties, and stage lighting. Students will be expected to participate in the mounting of a
departmental production.
184. Acting I. (5)
A course designed to introduce the fundamental techniques and principles of acting for the stage.
Students will work on both the physical and psychological aspects of acting.
190. Theater History. (5)
A survey of the development of theater from its beginnings to the modern period.
272. Creative Dramatics. (5)
A course which introduces the student to an improvisational, nonexhibitional, process-centered
form of drama designed to promote personal growth and educational development in young
children. This course will combine workshop experiences with practical classroom opportunities.
Recommended for early childhood and primary education majors.
283. Stage Management and Play Production. (2)
A course designed to provide the student with an introduction to, and basic training in, the areas
of stage management and play production. The course includes discussion of management and
production theory and practical exercises.
285. Theater Practicum. (1)
A course designed to provide opportunities for participation in various aspects of dramatic pro-
duction including acting, scenery and costume construction, lights, box office, promotion, and
house management. (May be repeated four times for credit.)
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
286. Makeup for the Stage. (2)
A study in the theories and application of stage makeup. Topics may include corrective, old age,
and character makeup, as well as prosthetics.
300-301-302. Summer Theater Repertory Company. (15)
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
310. Fundamentals of Playwriting. (5) (On demand)
A course designed to stimulate critical and creative faculties through the preparation of original
material for the theater. Students will be guided in the completion of writing a one-act play.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
Theater Arts 1 197
330. Analysis of Drama. (5)
A study of the major genres of dramatic literature through the application of various interpretive
models. Tragedy, comedy, and tragi-comedy will be approached from the perspective of the
designer, actor, and director.
331. Oral Interpretation of Literature. (5)
A course designed to enable the student to communicate his interpretation of a literary work to
an audience through the development of appropriate skills.
343. Drama in the Schools. (5) (On demand)
A course designed to provide students in the performing arts, and elementary and secondary
education with leadership experience in dramatic activities designated for young audiences.
345. Musical Theater I. (5)
A study of the development, the music, the staging, and the scripts of musical theater.
346. Musical Theater II. (5)
A study of the basic techniques of musical theater, emphasizing stage movement and singing and
acting styles. May be taken independently of Musical Theater I.
351. Advanced Acting. (5)
A continuation of THA 184, with increased emphasis on the performer's development of tech-
niques for characterization. The course will focus in greater detail on individual character analysis
as it pertains to specific textual demands.
Prerequisite: THA 184.
360. Principles of Theatrical Design. (5)
A course that introduces the student to drawing and drafting skills in preparation for the task of
design. These skills include perspective and figure drawing, drawing with highlight and shadow,
the use of color, and selected rendering materials and techniques.
Prerequisite: THA 180.
370. Fundamentals of Directing. (5)
A course designed to introduce students to the director's function in interpreting, planning, and
staging a play. The course includes theoretical discussion of directing techniques as well as prac-
tical directing experiences.
Prerequisite: THA 110, 180, 184, 330.
371. Children's Theater. (2)
A study of the theories, principles, and techniques of producing dramatizations for children.
Students will be expected to participate in the staging of a theatrical production.
381. Scenic and Lighting Design for the Stage. (5)
This course will provide the student with a series of practical design projects related to both stage
scenery and lighting.
Prerequisite: THA 360.
1 98 / Theater Arts
385. Basic Costume Design and Pattern Drafting. (5)
A course that acquaints the student with the basic skills needed to design theatrical costumes
and to draft patterns for costumes.
Prerequisites: THA 182 and THA 360.
420. Theater Management. (5)
An introduction to economic and administrative aspects of American theater, especially as they
apply to repertory, community, and educational organizations.
451. Auditioning. (5)
A course designed for developing audition techniques and examining guidelines for audition
procedures, with emphasis on resume organization and audition material selection and perform-
ance.
Prerequisite: THA 101 or 102, 110, 184.
470-1-2. Special Topics. (2-5 hours)
This series of courses provides the student with material not covered in courses presently offered
by the department, including but not limited to, Stage Combat and Period Styles of Acting.
Prerequisite: Consent of Instructor.
484. Production Seminar. (5)
A course designed to offer qualified juniors and seniors the opportunity to complete project
proposals in acting, directing, design (scenic, lighting, and costume), and playwriting. All proposals
must be approved by the Department Chair and are subject to scheduling and faculty supervisory
commitments.
/ 199
Faculty, Trustees and
Administration
Faculty
SPRING 1993
Nancy Thomas Alford (1969)
Assistant Professor of Health,
Physical Education and
Recreation; Dean of Student
Development
B.S., Georgia College at Milledgeville;
M.S., University of Tennessee
Ann Clark Bailey (1959)
Associate Professor of Modern
Foreign Languages
A.B., Wake Forest College; MA, Emory
University; University of Georgia
Mary Kathryn Bates (1984)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., Florida Southern College
M.S.N., Georgia State University
Charlene Baxter (1976)
Catalog Librarian
A.B., West Georgia College; M.L.S.,
George Peabody College for Teachers
Adolfo Benavides (1986)
Associate Professor of Business
Administration and Economics,
Chair, Division of Business and
Economics
B.B.A., University of Puerto Rico; M.A.,
Ph.D., Washington State University
Jon Birkeli (1987)
Associate Professor of Business
Administration and Economics
A.B., Lenoir-Rhyne College; Ph.D.,
University of South Carolina
Vernon S. Brown, Jr. (1982)
Associate Professor of Art and
Design
B.V.A., M.V.A., Georgia State University
Julia B. Burdett (1976)
Assistant Professor of Social
Work
A. A., Brewton Parker Jr. College: B.A.,
Tift College; M.R.E., Southern Baptist
Theological Seminary; M.S.W., Tulane
University
Joseph J. Cafaro (1984)
Associate Professor of History
A.A., Manatee Junior College; B.A.,
Florida Atlantic University; M.A., Ph.D.,
Florida State University
Roland B. Cousins (1990)
Professor of Business
Administration
B.S., M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute;
D.B.A., Indiana University
George M. Dupuy (1989)
Fuller E. Callaway Professor of
Management
B.A., College of William and Mary;
M.B.A., Ph.D., University of North
Carolina Chapel Hill
Sue M. Duttera (1990)
Associate Professor of Chemistry/
Physics
B.S., Ph.D., Duke University
Steven Earl Edwards (1992)
Assistant Professor of Theater
Arts
B.A., Texas Wesleyan University; M.A.,
University of Arkansas; Ph.D., Texas
Tech University
Steven Mark Ensley (1991)
Assistant Professor of Music
B.M., University of North Carolina;
M.M., M.F.A., University of Wisconsin;
Franz Schubert Institute
200 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration
Charles H. Evans (1981)
Associate Professor of Psychology
B.S., University of Georgia; M.S.,
University of Georgia; Ph.D., University
of Georgia
Michael C. Frassetto (1 990)
Assistant Professor of History
B.A., LaSalle University; M.A., Michigan
State University; Ph.D., University of
Delaware
Santiago A. Garcia (1977)
Professor of Education, Chair of
Division of Education
B.A., Tulane University; M.A., San Jose
State University; University of Maryland;
Ph.D., Georgia State University
Luke K. Gill, Jr. (1971)
Professor of Sociology/Social
Work, Assistant Dean for
Evening Studies
Georgia Southwestern College; B.B.A.,
University of Georgia; J.D., John Marshall
Law School; M.S.W., University of
Georgia; University of Georgia
Jill C. Guy (1991)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., Murray State University; M.S.N.,
University of Kentucky
Richard Harrison (1992)
Assistant Professor of Theater
Arts
B.A., Ottawa University; M.F.A., North
Carolina School of the Arts
Patrick M. Hicks (1958)
Associate Professor of Science
B.S., M.S., Auburn University; University
of Georgia
Samuel G. Hornsby, Jr. (1966)
Professor of English, Chair of
Humanities and Fine Arts
Division
Oxford College of Emory University;
B.S.Ed., M.A., University of Georgia;
University of London; Ph.D., Auburn
University
John C. Hurd (1974)
Professor of Biology
B.S., Alabama College; M.S., Ph.D.,
Auburn University
Frank A. James (1982)
Professor of Chemistry and Dean
of the College
B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D., University of Georgia
Lee E.Johnson (1990)
Associate Professor of Music
B.A., Auburn University; M.M., Indiana
University
Sandra K. Johnson (1983)
Professor of Health, Physical
Education and Recreation
B.A., Concordia College; M.Ed.,
University of Arizona; Ed.D., University
of North Carolina-Greensboro
Tony A. Johnson (1978)
Professor of Psychology
B.A., M.S., Mississippi State University;
Ph.D., University of Mississippi
Richard Donald Jolly (1961)
Professor of Mathematics, Chair
of Science and Mathematics
Division
B.A., University of Southern Mississippi;
M.S., University of Illinois; Tulane
University; Ed.D., Auburn University
Evelyn B.Jordan (1977)
Professor of Education
A.A., Middle George College; B.S.,
University of Georgia; M.Ed., Auburn
University; Ed.D., Auburn University
Charles P. Kraemer (1978)
Professor of Psychology, Chair,
Division of Social and Behavioral
Sciences
B.A., LaGrange College; M.S., University
of Georgia; Ph.D., University of Georgia
Sandra H. Kratina (1983)
Associate Professor of Nursing
Chair, Division of Nursing
B.S.N., Florida State University; M.S.N.,
University of Florida; Ph.D., Georgia
State University
Faculty, Trustees and Administration I 201
John D. Lawrence (1970)
Professor of Art and Design and
Director of the Lamar Dodd Art
Center
B.F.A., Millsaps College; Atlanta College
of Art; M.F.A., Tulane University
Frank R. Lewis (1973)
Librarian
A.B., North Carolina Central University;
M.L.S., Atlanta University
Tracy L. R. Lightcap (1991)
Assistant Professor of History and
Political Science
A.B., University of the South; M.A.,
University of South Carolina; Ph.D.,
Emory University
Keith William Lindley (1992)
Instructor of Modern Foreign
Languages
B.A., University of South Florida; M.A.,
University of Florida
Nina D. Mallory (1989)
Instructor of English
B.A., Clemson University; M.Ed.,
LaCrange College; Auburn University
Greg A. McClanahan (1988)
Associate Professor of
Mathematics
B.S., M.S., Auburn University; Ph.D.,
Clemson University
Ann C. McClellan (1989)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., M.S.N., University of Alabama
Kaye F. McClung (1991)
Assistant Professor of Business
Administration and Economics
B.S., Auburn University; MTA, University
of Alabama
Charles Franklin McCook (1961)
Professor of Religion
A.B., Emory University; S.T.B., S.T.M.,
Ph.D., Boston University; Hebrew Union
College, Hebrew University, Jerusalem,
Israel
William J. McCoy, IV (1991)
Assistant Professor of Chemistry/
Physics
B.S., Yale University; Ph.D., University of
North Carolina
Frederick V. Mills (1967)
Professor of History
A.B., Houghton College; S.T.B., Temple
School of Theology; M.Th., Princeton
Theology Seminary; M.A., Ph.D.,
University of Pennsylvania (on leave
1989-90, Harvard University)
Forest W. Morrisett (1 986)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.A., M.S., Arizona State University;
Ph.D., University of Arizona
Walter Y. Murphy (1980)
Professor of Religion and
Philosophy and President
A.B., Emory University; M.Div., Candler
School of Theology; LL.D., Bethune-
Cookman College; D.D., LaGrange
College
David L. Naglee (1966)
Professor of Religion and
Philosophy
A.B., Houghton College; Temple School
of Theology; M.Div., Crozer Theological
Seminary; M.A., Ph.D., Temple
University
Maynard L. Reid (1973)
Professor of Education
B.S.E., M.S.E., Georgia Southern College;
Ed.D., Auburn University
Kevin C. Reidy (1990)
Assistant Professor of Business
Administration and Economics
B.A., Gettysburg College; J.D., State
University of New York at BuffaJo; M.S.,
State University of New York at
Binghamton
Fay A. Riddle (1980)
Associate Professor of Computer
Science
B.S., H. Sophie Newcomb College of
Tulane University; M.S., Ph.D.,
University of Florida; University of South
Carolina
202 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration
Sybil L. Robison (1976)
Professor of Education
B.S., Troy State University; University of
Georgia; M.Ed., Auburn University;
University of Missouri; State University of
New York; Ed.D., Auburn University
Maranah A. Sauter (1983)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
A.A., B.S., Georgia Southwestern
College; M.S., Georgia State University
George Michael Searcy (1966)
Associate Professor of
Mathematics
A.B., LaGrange College; M.S., Auburn
University
Bailey Brooks Shelhorse, Jr. (1968)
Candler Professor of
Mathematics and Computer
Science
A.B., LaGrange College; M.A., Louisiana
State University; University of North
Carolina; M.Ed., Washington State
University; Ph.D., Georgia State
University; M.S., University of Evansville
Jack C. Slay Jr. (1992)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A., M.A., Mississippi State University;
Ph.D., University of Tennessee
Maria Dee Smith (1992)
Assistant Professor of Health,
Physical Education and
Recreation
B.S.-, William Jewell College; M.S.S.,
United States Sports Academy
Scott H. Smith (1988)
Associate Professor of English
B.A., Hobart College; M.A., Ph.D.,
University of Georgia
Perry A. Snyder (1990)
Vice President for Advancement
BA, Southeastern Louisiana University
M.A., Ph.D., Florida State University
Stephen W. Taft (1991)
Associate Professor of Theater
Arts
B.S.E., Central Missouri State University;
M.A., Southwest Missouri State
University; Ph.D., Texas Tech University
Timothy N. Taunton (1984)
Assistant Professor of Art and
Design
B.A., University of Arkansas-Little Rock;
M.F.A., Louisiana State University
Brenda W. Thomas (1989)
Assistant Professor of English
A.B., Samford University; M.A., Auburn
University
Ph.D., Georgia State University
Eugene C. Torbert (1 989)
Associate Professor of Modern
Foreign Languages
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of North
Carolina Chapel Hill; University of
Minnesota
Randy N. Unger (1990)
Instructor of Health, Physical
Education and Recreation
B.S., Taylor University; M.Ed., Georgia
Southern College
Steve G. Weaver (1 989)
Assistant Librarian
B.A., Warren Wilson College; M.S.L.S.,
University of North Carolina; M.A.,
University of Virginia
John M.Williams (1989)
Instructor of English
B.A., M.A., Auburn University
Mary K. Williams (1978)
Assistant Professor of Nursing
B.S.N., Emory University; M.S.N.,
George State University
Phillip R. Williamson (1969)
Associate Professor of Health,
Physical Education, and
Recreation; Director of Athletics
B.S., M.S., Troy State University
Faculty, Trustees and Administration/ 203
Carol M.Yin (1991)
Instructor of Mathematics
B.S., M.A.N. , Auburn University
Adjunct Faculty
Marcia Langham Brown
B.F.A., Guilford College; M.F.A.,
University of Georgia; Pennsylvania
Academy of the Fine Arts
Donald Lawrence Denney
B.S., North Georgia College; B.S.,
University of Georgia; M.S., Medical
University of South Carolina; Ph.D.,
University of Georgia
Christiane B. Price
Assistant Professor of Modern
Foreign Languages
M.A., Freie Universitat; Ph.D., Emory
University; the Sorbonne; Barcelona
University; Madrid University
Keith Allen Thomas
B.S., Western Kentucky University;
Ph.D., Auburn University
Part Time
Michael Angstadt
B.A., M.A., West Georgia College
Ronald Cole
B.A., University of Arkansas; M.Ed.,
Ph.D., Mississippi State University
Ann Daniel
Clinical Instructor
B.S.N., Valdosta State College
Randy Dye
B.S., Columbus College
Cindy Ensley
B.M., University of Wisconsin; M.M.,
Northwestern University
Lynn Harris
A.A., B.A., LaGrange College; B.S.N. ,
M.S.N., Medical College of Georgia
Edsel David Hobbs
B.S., M.S., Georgia Southern College
Roger Hudson
B.A., The College of Charleston; M.M.
Georgia State University
Barbara S. Miller
Clinical Instructor
B.A., M.S., University of Alabama
Katherine L. Newman
B.M., M.M., Auburn University
Auburn Rickman
B.M.E., University of Tennessee; M.B.A.
LaGrange College
Levis Spradlin, Jr.
A.A., B.S., LaGrange College; M.S.,
Columbus College
Stephanie Z. Stich
A.A., LaGrange College; B.S.N.,
Columbus College; M.B.A. , LaGrange
College
Alane A. Thompson
B.A., M.Ed., LaGrange College .
Phyllis S. Turner
A.B., LaGrange College; M.S., Auburn
University
204 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration
Emeriti
Marcus N. Gewinner
Professor of Psychology
B.A., LaGrange College; B.M., University
of Rochester, Eastman School of Music;
M.Ed., College of William and Mary;
Ed.D., Mississippi State University
Authur M. Hicks
Professor of Chemistry
A.B., M.S., Emory University; Rutgers
University; Ph.D., Auburn University
(1950-1986)
Walter Dickinson Jones,
Professor of English
A.B., Huntingdon College; M.A., Auburn
University; Ph.D., University of Alabama
(1962-1982)
Robert Preston Price II,
Fuller E. Callaway Professor of
Psychology
B.S., College of William and Mary in
Virginia; B.D., Emory University; Ph.D.,
Boston University (1971-1977)
John L Shibley
Professor of Biology
B.S., University of Oklahoma; M.S.,
Ph.D., University of Georgia (1950-1986)
Walter Malcolm Shackelford,
Professor of Education
A.B., Mississippi College; M.Ed.,
Louisiana State University; University of
Kentucky; Ed.D., University of Mississippi
(1958-1982)
Zachary Taylor, Jr.
Professor of Economics and
Business Administration
B.A., University of Alabama; Ph.D.,
University of Illinois (1956-1991)
Murial B. Williams,
Professor of English
A.B., M.A., Ph.D., University of Alabama
(1963-1993)
Faculty, Trustees and Administration I 205
Board of Trustees
Officers
Chairman Charles D. Hudson
Vice Chairman E. Malone Dodson
Second Vice Chairman Walter Y. Murphy
Secretary and Treasurer Robert S. Morton
Members Class
Daniel P. Amos, Columbus, Georgia 1995
Ray C. Anderson, LaGrange, Georgia 1995
tT. Scott Avary, Lanett, Alabama
Gerald C. Becham, LaGrange, Georgia Alumni Trustee
Mrs. Carolyn M. Bernard, Tucker, Georgia 1992
*J. Kennerly Boatwright, LaGrange, Georgia 1994
Arthur D. Bradfield, LaGrange, Georgia 1992
tDan F. Brewster, D.D., Newnan, Georgia
Robert Carmichael, LaGrange, Georgia
Larry Caywood, LaGrange, Georgia
J. Philip Cleaveland, LaGrange, Georgia 1993
Lovick P. Corn, Columbus, Georgia 1994
George "Buddy" Darden, Marietta, Georgia
E. Malone Dodson, Roswell, Georgia 1995
Charles A. Farr, LaGrange, Georgia
John J. Flynt, Jr., Griffin, Georgia 1992
Clifford C. Glover, West Point, Georgia 1993
*Edmond C. Glover, West Point, Georgia 1994
Edwin M. Gore, LaGrange, Georgia 1993
Mrs. Elizabeth Harris, Cartersville, Georgia 1995
Pat H. Holder, LaGrange, Georgia 1995
John E. Horton, Albany, Georgia
Charles D. Hudson, LL.D., LaGrange, Georgia 1992
William H. Hurdle, D.D., Macon, Georgia Ex Officio
J. Lloyd Knox (Bishop), Atlanta, Georgia
tjoseph L. Lanier, Jr., West Point, Georgia
J. Smith Lanier II, West Point, Georgia 1993
Mrs. Sim Manning, Alpharetta, Georgia Alumni Trustee
Charles M. Miller, Cornelia, Georgia 1992
Judge Lewis R. Morgan, LL.D., LaGrange, Georgia 1993
Roberts. Morton, LaGrange, Georgia 1993
Dillard Munford, Atlanta, Georgia 1994
J. Gardner Newman, LaGrange, Georgia 1995
O.F. Nixon, Jr., LaGrange, Georgia 1992
Miss Margaret A. Pitts, L.H.D., Waverly Hall, Georgia 1994
206 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration
President, Student Government Association Ex Officio
*S. Cliff Rainey, O.D., LaGrange, Georgia 1995
Larry B. Roberts, Macon, Georgia Alumni Trustee
*Charles W. Smith, LaGrange, Georgia 1993
tR. Woodrow Smith, LaGrange, Georgia
*John VV. Stewart, Jr., LaGrange, Georgia 1994
J. Madison Sullivan, Americus, Georgia 1993
*L. Henderson Traylor, Jr., LaGrange, Georgia 1994
H. Averett Walker, Albany, Georgia
tCharles R. Williams, D.D., Newborn, Georgia
D. Randall Williamson, Avondale Estates, Georgia 1992
Member Executive Committee
tTrustee Emeritus
Consultants
Wallace L. Bishop, Vice President
& Controller
Frank A. James, Vice President &
Dean of the College
John C. Hurd, Faculty
Representative
Perry A. Snyder, Vice President for
College Advancement
Legal Counsel
James R. Lewis
Financial Consultants
H. Speer Burdette, III
Fred L. Turner
Standing Committees LaGrange College Board of
Trustees
* Academic Affairs * Budget & Finance
Ray Anderson, Chairman , . ^ L ^.
~ ' . . _ . John Stewart, Chairman
Gerald Becham
Carolyn Bernard Ken Boatwr| g ht
Larry Caywood Edmund Glover
Malone Dodson Charles M. Miller
Byron Mathews Rett Walker
Frank James, Consultant Wallace Bishop, Consultant
Faculty, Trustees and Administration I 207
* Development
Dan Amos
Gerald Becham
Larry Caywood
Philip Cleaveland
Lovick P. Corn
John Flynt, Jr.
John Horton
Byron Mathews
Lewis Morgan
Randall Williamson
Perry Snyder, Consultant
* Investment
Lovick P. Corn, Chairman
J. Smith Lanier
Charles M. Miller
Robert S. Morton
Gardner Newman
Rett Walker
Wallace Bishop, Consultant
* Nominating Committee
Gardner Newman, Chairman
Arthur D. Bradfield
Lewis Morgan
* Student Affairs
Pat Holder, Chairman
Carolyn Bernard
Charles Farr
Elizabeth Harris
SGA President (Blaine
Chippendale)
Nancy Alford, Consultant
* Athletic Committee
Charles Smith, Chairman
Arthur Bradfield
Wayne Hunter
* Audit
Ken Boatwright, Chairman
J. Phillip Cleaveland
Wayne Hunter
* Buildings & Grounds
Edmund Glover, Chairman
Edwin Gore
Cliff Rainey
John Stewart
Henderson Traylor
Wallace Bishop, Consultant
* Insurance
Edwin Gore, Chairman
Pat Holder
J. Smith Lanier
Charles Smith
Wallace Bishop, Consultant
* Land Development
J. Matt Sullivan, Advisor
* Long Range Planning
Robert Morton, Chairman
Nancy Alford
Charles Farr
Lee Johnson
Sandra Johnson
Cliff Rainey
Henderson Traylor
SGA President (Blaine
Chippendale)
Wallace Bishop, Consultant
Mickey Grubb, Consultant
Frank James, Consultant
Perry Snyder, Consultant
* The Chairman of the Board of Trustees and the President are ex officio.
208 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration
Administrative Officers and Staff
Central Administration
Walter Y. Murphy (1980) - President
A.B., Emory University; M.Div., Candler School of Theology; LLD.,
Bethune-Cookman College; D.D., LaGrange College
Wallace L. Bishop (1982) - Vice President and Controller
B.S., Pennsylvania State University
Frank A. James (1 982) Vice President and Dean of the College
B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D., University of Georgia
Perry A. Snyder (1 990) Vice President for Advancement
B.A., Southeastern Louisiana University; MA, Ph.D., Florida State
University
Nancy Thomas Alford (1 969) Dean of Student Development
B.S., Georgia College at Milledgeville; M.S., University of Tennessee
Phillip Lee Dodson (1992) Director of Admission
B.A., LaGrange College
Hugh M. Grubb (1990) Director of Alumni Activities, Assistant to the
President, Coordinator for College Planning
B.A., LaGrange College; M.Div., Candler School of Theology, Emory
University
Jimmy G. Herring (1974) Registrar and Coordinator of Institutional
Research
B.A., LaGrange College
Jeffrey B. Sargent (1993) Director of Institutional Relations
B.A., LaGrange College; M.S., Columbus College
Sylvia A. Smith (1985) Director of Student Financial Planning
B.A., LaGrange College
Administrative Staff
Nancy T. Alford (1 969) Dean of Student Development
Kay H. Austin (1991) Secretary, Institutional Relations
Charlene Baxter (1976) Assistant Librarian and Cataloger
Linda E. Benitz (1991) Secretary, Business Administration and Economics
Wallace L. Bishop (1982) - Vice President and Controller
Dee Bradley (1992) Secretary, Education Division
Joneita Byce (1988) Residence Hall Director
Faculty, Trustees and Administration I 209
Charles A. Clearwater (1993) - Director of Career Planning and Placement
Services
Cheryl Clearwater (1993) Receptionist, Admission Office
Essie M. Cleaveland (1977) Receptionist
Austin P. Cook, III (1981) - Postal Services
Janice M. Copeland (1990) Secretary, Humanities and Fine Arts Division
Angela Parmer Costa (1986) Information Systems Coordinator, Alumni
Office
Margaret Davis (1988) Assistant Director of Admission
Sandra Dennis (1972) Student Accounts, Business Office
Gwendolyn S. Dixon (1992) Office Assistant, Business Office
Margaret B. Funderburk (1970) College Nurse
G. Jeffrey Geeter (1990) Soccer and Tennis Coach
Luke K. Gill, Jr. (1971) Assistant Dean for Evening Studies
Edi Glover (1990) - Curator, Lamar Dodd Art Center
Jesslyn Gray (1992) Director of Residence Life
Hugh M. Grubb (1989) Director of Alumni Activities, Assistant to the
President, Coordinator for College Planning
H. Mark Hall (1992) - Network Manager
Judith S. Hammerton (1987) English as a Second Language
Susan A. Hancock (1975) Secretary, Alumni Office
Wylene Herndon (1979) Campus Traffic Control
Jimmy G. Herring (1974) Registrar and Coordinator of Institutional
Research
Frank A. James (1982) Vice President and Dean of the College
Gloria H. Jones (1992) - Office Assistant, Business Office
Jennifer R. Johns (1992) Counselor, Admission Office
Margaret H. Keeble (1992) Coordinator, Nontraditional Student Services
Donna Kelley (1990) Secretary, Natural Sciences and Mathematics
Division
Kathy B. King (1991) - Office Manager, Admission Office
Iris L. Knowles (1988) Assistant Business Manager
Anita Laney (1974) Manager of Bookstore
Frank R. Lewis (1973) - Librarian
Laura Scott Lewis (1990) Admission Counselor
210 / Faculty, Trustees and Administration
Elizabeth C. Loftin (1989) - Office Assistant, Registrar's Office
Dana M. Love (1992) Counselor, Admission Office
Lisa K. Maddox (1991) Acquisitions Assistant, Library
George J. Mastrovaselis (1992) Data Base Manager
Kirby H. McCartney (1983) Administrative Assistant, Student
Development Office
Margaret McCrary (1993) Secretary, Social and Behavioral Sciences
Division
Melissa McDonald (1983) Administrative Assistant, Registrar's Office
Stephanie Middleton (1991) Circulation Library Assistant/Systems
Manager
Yvonne Mills (1986) Periodicals Assistant, Library
Jackie L. Morman, Sr. (1992) Maintenance Assistant
Emmett H. Mullins (1992) Manager, Callaway Campus
Walter Y. Murphy (1980) - President
Jeffrey D. Pardue (1992) - Junior Varsity Basketball Coach
Willette B. Phillips (1968) - Administrative Assistant, Office of Dean of the
College
Nancy Prescott-Kane (1993) Student Financial Planning Counselor
Laura Rains (1990) Chaplain and Counselor
Effie Rasnick (1984) - Residence Hall Director
Patricia H. Roberts (1978) Student Financial Planning Assistant
Tammy Rogers (1992) Secretary, College Advancement
Edward W. Scharre, Jr. (1989) Associate Dean of Student Development
Lori Slay (1992) Associate in English
Scott H. Smith Director of Testing for Institutional Effectiveness
Sylvia A. Smith (1985) Director, Student Financial Planning
Perry A. Snyder (1 990) Vice President for Advancement
Barbara Storie (1992) Secretary, Health, Physical Education and
Recreation Department
Patricia L. Talley (1991) Director of Development
Brenda W. Thomas (1989) Director of Writing Center
Brenda A. Thompson (1989) Executive Secretary to the President
Larry Thompson Jr. (1989) - Volleyball, Softball Coach
Emma S. Trammell (1992) Secretary, Admission Office
Faculty, Trustees and Administration/ 21 1
Margaret Underdown (1988) Secretary, Nursing Division
Randy Unger (1990) - Basketball Coach
Darlene R. Weathers (1988) Assistant Manager of Bookstore
Steve G. Weaver (1 989) Reference Librarian
Phillip R. Williamson (1969) - Athletic Director, Baseball Coach
212/
Degrees Awarded
June 5, 1993
Associate of Arts
Cherryl Ann Athon
Edna B. Carter
Tiffany Wintress Chippendale
Lillie Jackson Cole
Teresa Lynn Abercrombie Corley
Nikki Marie Corn
Kelli Jean Crabtree
Kimberly Ann Doss
Mary Annette Driver
Shea Leigh Ford
Penny Frances Foster
Teresa Davis Gaston
Vallie Faith Cibby
Donna Jernigan Graybill
Kathy Diane Hammock
Jolyn Blackwell Harris
Lucinda F. Jackson
Juanita Ray Jeffcoat
Sylvia A. Jones
Yoko Kim para
Jasminka Kojanovic
Jason Scott Lawrence
Larry Blake Lester
Mario Patrice Manning
Kimberly T. Murphy
Anna Willoughby Odom
Maureen Ann Oles
Mary Hoyle Reeves
Julie Annette Rice
Shannon Leigh Rush
Deborah Anne Scribner
Sonya Michelle Shaddix
David M. Slocumb
E. Charlene Stone
Nancy Hannah Thompson
Rebecca Delores Walston
Dale Ann Martin Ward
Kazuya Yanase
Bachelor of Arts Degree
Charles Bernard Allen, Sr.
Dana Fuad Almasri
Jon E. Anderson
Shelley Lynn Baker
Melissa G. Ballew
James Gordon Barker, II
John Michael Bass
Robin Elizabeth Bassett
Russell Daniel Blalock
Connie G. Boone
Tiffany Wynn Breed
Kelly Jo Britsky
Steven Charles Brown
Tricia LeeAnn Bufford
Bradford Brundage
Darin Kale Capes
Carol Gilbert Carden
William Curtis Carson
Teresa Price Carter
Joanne Johnson Clay
Deborah Page Clements
Angela Donielle Clifton
Cynthia McLeroy Cofield
Deborah Dawn Corley
Celon Kaye Cotter
Kacey Kathleen Cox
Thmeaka Cherwanda Crawl
Loree Christine Crick
James Daniel Crow
Robin Franklin Daoust
Degrees Awarded/ 213
Kimberly Dawn Davis
Ravata Beatrice Davis
James Christopher Dickson
Elizabeth Stacy Dix
Krista Lynn Drescher
Stacy Dumas
Danita Miranda Dunson
Larry Duffield Duquette, Jr.
Mary T. Edmondson
Sherri Cole Everett
Amy Rachel Faulds
Irene O'Connor Sumakis Fries
Valerie Leigh Fryer
John R. Fuller, Jr.
Christina Marie Grupe
Christopher Lee Hamon
Christy Chappell Haney
Sandra Bailey Hansen
Mary Leslie Hardy
Frederick Bernard Harmon
John Stuart Harrell
Amanda Rudeen Hathcock
Matthew Pride Hawkins
Kan Hayashi
Sylvia Johnson Heard
Terri C. Herndon
Marie Julia Hicks
Joli Ann Higgins
James Scott Hubbard
John William Hudson
Lorraine T. Hudson
William Patrick Hughes
Rhonda Faye Hyatt
Thomas Matthew Jackson
Erskine Anthony James
Joseph Allen Jarrett
Dorothy Anne Jones
Linda B. Jordan
Elisabeth Renee Jordin
Teresa Brewer King
Midori Kobayashi
Penny Lynn Kojak
Adelia Anne Ladson
James Allard Laney, III
Sherry Regina Pung Lego
Michelle Harrison Melton
Melanie Christine Miller
Nicole Lyn Miller
Sonya Michele Miller
Thomas Allen Mills
Daryl Sean Morris
Frances Michelle Morris
Roy Lee Moss
Susan Joan Mote
James Cary Mullikin
Andrea Leigh Mullins
Linh Thi Thuy Nguyen
Hiroki Nishioka
Sandra Rebecca Norris
Stephen Shane Norris
Maureen Ann Oles
Mary Christine Williford Oliver
Mary Ellen Parkins
Betty Annette Parmer
Amy Elaine Parrott
Kristi Carol Plunkett
Barbara J. Price
Maurice Lamonte Pritchett
Stephanie Leigh Pryor
Christopher Shane Pulliam
Debra Ann Pulliam
Thomas Mitchell Purvis, II
Sarah Margaret Randall
Katheryn Paige Ray
Elisa Dawn Riddell
Barry Alan Satterfield
Tendai Jonathan Shambare
John Herbert Sheffield
Melissa Love Shell
Michael W. Shrewsbury
John Russell Siers
Eric Lamar Simpson
Tracy Lee Holden Sims
Angie Elaine Slaughter
Ashley Randall Smith
Gayle Annette Smith
Sean Michael Smith
Timothy Griggs Smith
Amy Freeman Speaks
Lisa Jo Spillers
214 / Degrees Awarded
Sandy Elaine Sproles William Dan Waller
Susan Page Stadler LeGail Ward
Trina Lynn Stewart Dana Michele Weaver
Michele Lee Striplin Arthur Andrew Wick
Tana Morton Tarver Laurje Djanne wi || iamson
Me issa Dianne Tay or ^, . . . , . A/ . M . ,
r . l ., ' Christopher L. Willmgham
Lorraine Fly Thomas _ , .....
ki ^ i-i i i_ -t-u Kelly Burks Wilmore
Nathan Fletcher Thompson , , ^
Jacqueline Elaine Mahone Thornton Rachel Green Wmk,es
jeannie Tomme Susannah Elizabeth Wolfor
Meshka Gael Tull Mary Jill Womack
Mark C. Turner Susan Elizabeth Woody
Noboru Ueki Michiko Yanagita
Ashli Lynn Wade Kathleen W. Yates
Gena Lynn Waldrop Judy Holmes Yonce
Angela Christine Walker Donald Kevin Youmans
Bachelor of Business Administration Degree
Dawn Marie Allen Byron Keith Jones
Gregory Allan Baggett , ngrid Cornelia Leek
Patrick Philip Bexton i^^u Dr : ka^^i
, .. ,,. , Joseph Brian Manning
Leslie Kirsten Bushar k r 1#I1
Matthew Czarick N. Yvonne Mills
Valeria Cameron Heard Tim Schippmann
Benjamin Henkels Jeffery Mack Skinner
Bachelor of Science Degree
Markus Fueger Jonathan Patrick Nivens
Sonya Senithia Gaither Gary Edward Whitehall
Jennifer Elizabeth Hutcherson
Master of Business Administration Degree
Shemmonya Lee Bonner Stephen Andrew Markiewicz
Mark Clayton Callaway Roswe || A || en Morgan
Robert Wesley Downie . . . A ^ n m:
, ,, , I. Leieh Anne Nipper
Jeffery Louis Fix rr ^.
Randall Ford Hammock Auburn Fletcher R,ckman
Jeffery S. Haynes Shirley S. Smith
Kelly Mitchell Hearn Lee Tinch, Jr.
Degrees Awarded/ 21 5
Master of
Cheryl Sanders Dailey
Marcia Catherine Fountain Ferri
Jennie Walston Freeman
Elizabeth Ann Gaddy
Kelley E. Gill
Kelly Lynn Arrington Hanners
Barbra Ann Hornsby
Leslie Payne Howard
Tracy Michelle Jones
Education Degree
Jean Weathersby Lanier
Lisa L. Lemmings
Sharon Carlisle Niedrach
Joanna Kaye Pruitt
Donna Adkins Shepard
Susan Rene Taunton
Patricia Dunn Williams
Rachel Bailey Worrell
Margaretta Howard Wright
216/
Index
Associate Degree Requirements 69, 70
Abbreviations 94
Academic Calendar 4, 5
Academic Divisions 92
Academic Honors 75
Academic Load 78
Academic Programs 62
Academic Probation 74
Academic Petition 80
Academic Regulations and Procedures 73
Academic Standing 74
Acceleration 75
Accreditation 9
Administration 208
Administrative Regulations 73
Admission 17
Advisers 64, 67
Appeal 31, 58, 80
Aquatics 55
Assessment 64, 68
Athletic Associations 54
Athletics '. 54, 55
Attendance Regulations:
Class Attendance 74
Auditing Courses 77
Awards & Recognitions 81
Baccalaureate Degree Requirements 61, 78
Calendar, Academic 4, 5
Career Planning 57
Change of Regulations 3
Communications Directory Inside Cover
Concentration 61
Conduct 56
Cooperative Programs 85
Continuing Education 71
Counseling 58, 64
Courses of Instruction
Art 95
Biology 100
Business Administration 104
Chemistry 112
Computer Science 118
Criminal Justice 123
Dance 125
Economics 126
Education 130
English 138
French 162
General Science 143
German 162
Health, Physical Education
& Recreation 144
History 150
Mathematics 156
Modern Foreign Language 162
Music 166
Nursing 170
Philosophy 173
Physics 174
Political Science 1 75
Psychology 180
Religion 185
Social Work (see Sociology) 189
Sociology 189
Spanish 162
Speech 192
Theater Arts 193
Course Repetition 75, 79
Credit-by-Examination and Exemption
Advanced Placement 67, 75
College Level Examination Program (CLEP) 67, 75
Credit through USAFI and Service Schools 76
Curriculum (See Courses of Instruction)
Day Clinic 57
Dean's List 75
Degree Requirements 61
Degrees Offered 62
Discipline 56
Divisions, Academic
Business Administration and Economics 92
Education 92
Humanities and Fine Arts 92
Nursing 92
Natural Sciences and Mathematics 92
Social and Behavioral Sciences 93
Early Admission 18
Endowed Lectureships 81
Expenses and Fees 21
Faculty 199
Fees 21
Financial Aid 25
Financial Information 21
Financial Planning 25
Fraternities:
Honorary 53
Social 53
Freshman Seminar 67
General Education Curriculum
B.A., B.S., B.B.A 65
AA 69
General Information 7
Grade Points 78
Grades and Credits 78
Graduates 1993 212
Graduation Petitions 80
Graduation Rates 81
Graduation Requirements 61
Grants-in-Aid 49
History of the College 8
Holidays (See Academic Calendar)
Honor Societies 53
Honors, Prizes, and Awards 81
Housing Requirements 52
Incomplete Grade 77
Independent Study 63
Infirmary (See Day Clinic)
Intercollegiate Athletics 54
Intramural Sports 54
International Students 20, 76, 139
Joint Enrollment 19
Languages 162
Lectures 56, 81
Library 11
Loans 35, 45, 46
Location of College 8
Majors 62
Master of Business Administration Degree 104
Master of Education Degrees 130
Index I 21 7
Medical Care 23, 57
Minors 71
Mission 7
Non-traditional student 68
Non-typical student 68
Officers:
Administration 208
Board of Trustees 205
On-Trial 19
Organizations:
Honorary 53
Religious 53
Service 53
Special Interests 53
Students 53
Talent 53
Orientation (Freshman Seminar) 67
Overload 75, 78
Petition, Academic 80
Placement (Course) 66
Placement Service 57
Philosophy of College 7
Pre-professional Programs 85
Probation, Academic 74
Publications 54, 96, 140
Purpose 7
Quality Points 78
Quarter Hours 78
Quarter on Trial 19
Refund Policy 24
Registration and Academic Advisers 64, 67, 68
Religion-in-Life Lectures:
Thompson Lectureship 81
Religious Life 55
Requirements:
Admissions 17
Degree 61, 78
Graduation 80
Residence Requirements ..79
Room and Board 52
Scholarships 37
Social Life 51
Sororities, Social 53
Special Institutes 71
Special Studies 63
Staff 208
Student Affairs 51
Student Conduct 56
Student Government 53
Student:
Aid 25
Classification 79
Housing 52
Organizations 53
Publications 54, 96, 140
Review of Decisions 31, 58,80
Summer School 10
Summer Theater Laboratory 196
Teacher Education and Certification 130
Testing 58, 64, 68
ACT 58
CEEB (SAT) 18, 58
CLEP 67
COMP 68
GRE 58
Miller Analogies 58
Testing Fee 22
Time Restrictions:
Major 63
General Education 67
Transcripts 80
Transfer, Admission of 19
Transient Student to and from
LaGrange College 19, 79
Trustees, Board of 205
Tuition and Fees:
General Summary 23
Withdrawal 74, 77
Writing Center 138
Work Opportunities 28, 57
2.-S
fD rt
>i
F *>
C) n
s
00
c
!^S
z
I =
if
Ft
-< 3
o a,
O
O OQ
0> rc
- * ? r-
03 n o
00 O w
KJ O Q.
* 5' ?
_i w rD
O -*
O
m
H
n
r
o
>
r
O
r
>d
>
z
w
w
r- V)
>
>
z
o
*3
Q
>
o
o
>
o
O
m